Vsx 52 operating-instructions051911

IMPORTANT
CAUTION 1) Read these instructions. 11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK the manufacturer.
2) Keep these instructions.
DO NOT OPEN
3) Heed all warnings. 12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, CAUTION: The exclamation point within an equilateral 4) Follow all instructions. table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC triangle is intended to alert the user to the 5) Do not use this apparatus near water. the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR presence of important operating and when moving the cart/apparatus combination to
6) Clean only with dry cloth.
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
enclosure that may be of sufficient INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED literature accompanying the appliance. 7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in avoid injury from tip-over.
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric SERVICE PERSONNEL. accordance with the manufacturer’s
shock to persons. instructions.
D3-4-2-1-1_A1_En 8) Do not install near any heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce
WARNING WARNING
heat.
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire or To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized
shock hazard, do not place any container filled with sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment.
or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two 13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms
liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower D3-4-2-1-7a_A1_En
blades with one wider than the other. A or when unused for long periods of time.
pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or
grounding type plug has two blades and a third 14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
moisture.
Operating Environment grounding prong. The wide blade or the third Servicing is required when the apparatus has
D3-4-2-1-3_A1_En
Operating environment temperature and humidity: prong are provided for your safety. If the provided been damaged in any way, such as power-supply
+5 °C to +35 °C (+41 °F to +95 °F); less than 85 %RH plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled
WARNING electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the
(cooling vents not blocked)
Before plugging in for the first time, read the following 10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in
section carefully. pinched particularly at plugs, convenience does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or
The voltage of the available power supply differs receptacles, and the point where they exit from
strong artificial light)
according to country or region. Be sure that the D3-4-2-1-7c*_A1_En the apparatus. D3-7-13-69_En
power supply voltage of the area where this unit
will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V
or 120 V) written on the rear panel. If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC
D3-4-2-1-4*_A1_En outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed NOTE:
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
VENTILATION CAUTION mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space this unit should be performed only by qualified residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
(at least 40 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and 20 cm at each cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
side). sure it is properly disposed of after removal. harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
The equipment should be disconnected by removing the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
WARNING the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused — Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for for a long period of time (for example, when on — Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, vacation). — Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
and to protect it from overheating. To prevent fire D3-4-2-2-1a_A1_En — Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
hazard, the openings should never be blocked or D8-10-1-2_A1_En

covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths,
curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet CAUTION
or a bed. The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not Caution WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or
D3-4-2-1-7b*_A1_En completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. To prevent fire hazard, the Class 2 Wiring Cable cords associated with accessories sold with the
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect should be used for connection with speaker, and product may expose you to chemicals listed on
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the should be routed away from hazards to avoid damage proposition 65 known to the State of California and
AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore, make to the insulation of the cable. other governmental entities to cause cancer and
sure the unit has been installed so that the power D3-7-13-67*_A1_En birth defect or other reproductive harm.
cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in
case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard, the power D36-P5_B1_En

cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet Information to User
when left unused for a long period of time (for Alterations or modifications carried out without
example, when on vacation). appropriate authorization may invalidate the user’s
D3-4-2-2-2a*_A1_En right to operate the equipment.
D8-10-2_A1_En

2 En

IMPORTANT NOTICE The Safety of Your Ears is in Your Hands
THE MODEL NUMBER AND SERIAL NUMBER OF Get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a
THIS EQUIPMENT ARE ON THE REAR OR BOTTOM. safe level – a level that lets the sound come through
RECORD THESE NUMBERS ON YOUR ENCLOSED clearly without annoying blaring or distortion and, most
WARRANTY CARD AND KEEP IN A SAFE PLACE importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.
FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. Sound can be deceiving. Over time, your hearing
D36-AP9-1_A1_En “comfort level” adapts to higher volumes of sound, so
what sounds “normal” can actually be loud and
harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by setting
CAUTION your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing
This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded adapts.
cables and connectors are used to connect the unit
to other equipment. To prevent electromagnetic
ESTABLISH A SAFE LEVEL:
• Set your volume control at a low setting.
interference with electric appliances such as radios
• Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it
and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors
comfortably and clearly, without distortion.
for connections.
D8-10-3a_A1_En • Once you have established a comfortable sound
level, set the dial and leave it there.

This product is for general household purposes. Any
BE SURE TO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING
failure due to use for other than household purposes GUIDELINES:
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a • Do not turn up the volume so high that you can’t
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires hear what’s around you.
repair will be charged for even during the warranty • Use caution or temporarily discontinue use in
period. potentially hazardous situations.
K041_A1_En • Do not use headphones while operating a motorized
vehicle; the use of headphones may create a traffic
hazard and is illegal in many areas.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with S001a_A1_En

Canadian ICES-003.
D8-10-1-3_A1_En

CAUTION:
HOT SURFACE. DO NOT TOUCH.
The top surface over the internal
heatsink may become hot when
operating this product continuously.

En 3

Thank you for buying this Pioneer Connecting additional amplifiers................ 20 07 Playback with HOME MEDIA Direct function .............................................. 57
Connecting AM/FM antennas ..................... 21 GALLERY inputs Setting the backlight mode ......................... 58
product. Please read through these
MULTI-ZONE setup ....................................... 21 Enjoying the Home Media Gallery............... 41 Multi Operation and System Off.................. 58
operating instructions so you will Connecting a SiriusConnect Tuner............. 22 Resetting the remote control settings ........ 59
Features of Home Media Gallery ................. 41
know how to operate your model Connecting to the network through Introduction................................................... 41 Controlling components .............................. 59
properly. After you have finished read- LAN interface ................................................ 22 Playback with Home Media Gallery ............ 42
Connecting optional Bluetooth 11 The Advanced MCACC menu
ing the instructions, put them away Advanced operations for Internet radio ...... 43
ADAPTER ...................................................... 22 Checking about the Accounts ..................... 43 Making receiver settings from the
in a safe place for future reference. Connecting an iPod ...................................... 23 About network playback............................... 44 Advanced MCACC menu ............................. 62
Connecting a USB device ............................ 23 About playable file formats .......................... 45 Automatic MCACC (Expert) ......................... 62
Contents Connecting an HDMI-equipped
component to the front panel input ............ 23
Manual MCACC setup ................................. 64
Checking MCACC Data................................ 66
08 Control with HDMI function
Connecting to a wireless LAN ..................... 23 Data Management........................................ 67
01 Before you start About the Control with HDMI function....... 47
Connecting an IR receiver ........................... 23
Our philosophy................................................ 6 Making Control with HDMI connections.... 47
Operating other Pioneer components
Features ........................................................... 6 HDMI Setup................................................... 47 12 The System Setup and Other
with this unit’s sensor .................................. 24
Checking what’s in the box ............................ 6 Switching components on and off
Before using synchronization...................... 48 Setup menus
Installing the receiver ..................................... 6 About synchronized operations .................. 48 Making receiver settings from the
using the 12 volt trigger................................ 24
Loading the batteries...................................... 6 Setting the PQLS function ........................... 48 System Setup menu ..................................... 69
Plugging in the receiver ............................... 25
Operating range of remote control unit........ 7 Cautions on the Control with HDMI Manual speaker setup.................................. 69
About using AVNavigator (included function ......................................................... 49 Network Setup menu ................................... 71
04 Basic Setup Checking the Network Information............. 73
CD-ROM) ......................................................... 7
Switching the speaker impedance ............. 26
09 Using other functions The Other Setup menu ................................. 73
Changing the OSD display language
02 Controls and displays Setting the Audio options ............................ 50
(OSD Language) ........................................... 26
Remote control ............................................... 8 Automatically conducting optimum
Setting the Video options ............................. 52 13 Additional information
Display ............................................................. 9 Switching the speaker terminals ................ 53 Troubleshooting 1 ......................................... 76
sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) ............... 26
Front panel .................................................... 10 Using the MULTI-ZONE controls ................. 53 Troubleshooting 2 ......................................... 82
The Input Setup menu.................................. 28
Making an audio or a video recording ........ 54 Troubleshooting of wireless LAN ................ 85
Operation Mode Setup ................................. 28
Reducing the level of an analog signal....... 54 About status messages ............................... 86
03 Connecting your equipment
Using the sleep timer ................................... 54 Speaker Setting Guide.................................. 86
Connecting your equipment ........................ 11 05 Basic playback Dimming the display .................................... 54 Important information regarding the
Rear panel ..................................................... 11 Playing a source ........................................... 30 Switching the HDMI output ......................... 54 HDMI connection ......................................... 87
Determining the speakers’ application ...... 12 Playing an iPod ............................................. 30 Checking your system settings ................... 55 Cleaning the unit .......................................... 87
Placing the speakers .................................... 13 Playing a USB device ................................... 31 Resetting the system .................................... 55 Surround sound formats ............................. 88
Connecting the speakers ............................. 13 Listening to the radio.................................... 33
Installing your speaker system .................... 14 About THX ..................................................... 88
Listening to Satellite Radio .......................... 33
Selecting the Speaker system ..................... 15 10 Controlling the rest of your system About iPod..................................................... 89
Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless About SIRIUS ................................................ 89
About the audio connection ........................ 16 About the Remote Setup menu................... 56
Enjoyment of Music...................................... 35 About FLAC ................................................... 89
About the video converter ............................ 16 Operating multiple receivers ....................... 56
About HDMI .................................................. 16 Setting the remote to control other Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct
06 Listening to your system components .................................................. 56 with different input signal formats .............. 90
Connecting your TV and playback
Enjoying various types of playback Selecting preset codes directly ................... 56 Glossary ......................................................... 91
components .................................................. 17
using the listening modes ........................... 37 Programming signals from other Features index ............................................... 94
Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD
Selecting MCACC presets ........................... 39 remote controls............................................. 57 Specifications ............................................... 95
recorder and other video sources ............... 19
Choosing the input signal ............................ 39 Erasing one of the remote control Preset code list.............................................. 96
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or
Better sound using Phase Control.............. 39 button settings .............................................. 57
other set-top box ........................................... 19
Better sound using Phase Control and Erasing all learnt settings that are in
Connecting other audio components......... 20
Full Band Phase Control .............................. 39 one input function ........................................ 57
4 En

Flow of settings on the receiver 7 Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language) (page 26)
j
8 MCACC speaker settings
! Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 26
Flow for connecting and setting the receiver j
The unit is a full-fledged AV receiver equipped with an abundance of functions and terminals. It can
9 The Input Setup menu (page 28)
be used easily after following the procedure below to make the connections and settings.
(When using connections other than the recommended connections)
Required setting item: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10
j
Setting to be made as necessary: 5, 7, 9, 11, 12, 13, 14
10 Basic playback (page 30)
j
Important
The receiver’s initial settings can be made on the computer using Wiring Navi on the AVNavigator 11 Switching the HDMI output (page 54)
CD-ROM included with the receiver. In this case, virtually the same connections and settings as VSX-53 only
in steps 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8 and 9 can be made interactively. For instructions on using AVNavigator, see j
About using AVNavigator (included CD-ROM) on page 7 . 12 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired
1 Before you start ! Using the various listening modes (page 37)
! Checking what’s in the box on page 6 ! Better sound using Phase Control (page 39)
! Loading the batteries on page 6 ! Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control (VSX-53 only) (page 39)
j ! Measuring the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL CH ADJ/FRONT ALIGN) (page 62)
! Changing the channel level while listening (page 70)
2 Determining the speakers’ application (page 12) ! Switching on/off the Acoustic Calibration EQ, Auto Sound Retriever or
! 7.2 channel surround system (Front height) Dialog Enhancement (page 50)
! 7.2 channel surround system (Front wide) ! Setting the PQLS function (page 48)
! 7.2 channel surround system & Speaker B connection ! Setting the Audio options (page 50)
! 5.2 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround) ! Setting the Video options (page 52)
! 5.2 channel surround system & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone) j
j
13 Other optional adjustments and settings
3 Connecting the speakers ! Control with HDMI function (page 47)
! Placing the speakers on page 13 ! The Advanced MCACC menu (page 62)
! Connecting the speakers on page 13 ! The System Setup and Other Setup menus (page 69)
! Installing your speaker system on page 14 j
! Bi-amping your speakers on page 15
j 14 Making maximum use of the remote control
! Operating multiple receivers (page 56)
4 Connecting the components ! Setting the remote to control other components (page 56)
! About the audio connection on page 16
! About the video converter on page 16
! Connecting your TV and playback components on page 17
! Connecting AM/FM antennas on page 21
! Plugging in the receiver on page 25
j
5 Switching the speaker impedance (page 26)
(Only if the impedance of the connected speakers is 6 W to 8 W)
j
6 Power On
j

En 5

01 Before you start

Before you start % Bluetooth compatible
Using the Bluetooth ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or
— in direct sunlight
— in damp or wet areas
AS-BT200) lets you enjoy music files on an — in extremely hot or cold areas
iPhone or other Bluetooth wireless technology — in places where there is vibration or other
% AVNavigator movement
Our philosophy The CD-ROM (AVNavigator) included with this
device wirelessly.
% Auto Sound Retriever — in places that are very dusty
Pioneer is dedicated to making your home unit provides a variety of functions, such as
The Auto Sound Retriever feature employs — in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as
theater listening experience as close as pos- Wiring Navi with a guide for connecting the
DSP technology to restore sound pressure a kitchen)
sible to the vision of the moviemakers and mas- unit and setting up from the computer and an
and smooth jagged artifacts left over after ! Do not touch this receiver’s bottom panel
tering engineer when they created the original Interactive Manual for operating the unit while
compression. while the power is on or just after it is turned
soundtrack. We do this by focusing on three reading the manual. off. The bottom panel becomes hot when the
important steps: % Easy setup using Advanced MCACC
% PQLS power is on (or right after it is turned off) and
1 Designing with carefully selected Jitterless high quality playback is possible by The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but could cause burns.
components so as to transmit the original connecting a PQLS-compatible player with accurate surround sound setup, which includes
soundtrack accurately HDMI connections. the advanced features of Professional Acoustic
Calibration EQ. Loading the batteries
2 Allowing for customized acoustic % iPod playback
calibration according to any listening area Your iPod can be connected to the receiver’s The batteries included with the unit are to check
3 Tuning that transmits soul USB terminal to play the music/video files on Checking what’s in the box initial operations; they may not last over a long
the iPod. period. We recommend using alkaline batteries
Please check that you’ve received the following that have a longer life.
Also, the iPod is charged when it is connected
supplied accessories:
Features to the receiver.
! Setup microphone (cable: 5 m (16.4 ft.))
% Advanced Direct Energy design ! Remote control unit
% HDMI (3D, Audio Return Channel)
This receiver offers a new advancement in dis- ! AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries (to confirm
A compatible component is required to use the
crete design unique to Pioneer for high-power system operation) x2
above function.
drivability, low distortion and stable imaging. ! AM loop antenna
% HOME MEDIA GALLERY
% Dolby Pro Logic llz compatible ! FM wire antenna
This receiver can play back contents stored
Adding a pair of speakers above the front left ! iPod cable WARNING
on your computer when your computer is con-
and right speakers adds expressiveness in the ! Power cord ! Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight
nected to the LAN terminal of this receiver.
vertical direction to the previous horizontally- ! CD-ROM (AVNavigator) or other excessively hot place, such as inside a
% About operation of the receiver with a oriented sound field. The height channel ! Warranty card car or near a heater. This can cause batteries
mobile terminal (iPod, iPhone, etc.) strengthens the sound field’s sense of three- ! These operating instructions to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It
The receiver can be controlled from the mobile dimensionality and air, producing presence and can also reduce the life or performance of
terminal by installing a special application on expansion. batteries.
the mobile terminal. For details, see the product
% Internet Radio Installing the receiver
information on the Pioneer website. ! When installing this unit, make sure to put it CAUTION
By connecting this receiver to the network via
This special application may be changed or on a level and stable surface. Incorrect use of batteries may result in such
the LAN terminal, you can listen to Internet
discontinued without notice. ! Don’t install it on the following places: hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the
radio stations.
% Remote operation on an iPod touch/ — on a color TV (the screen may distort) following precautions:
% SIRIUS Ready
iPhone/iPad — near a cassette deck (or close to a device that ! Never use new and old batteries together.
With the SIRIUS Radio terminal, you’ll be up
Operation via LAN is possible from an iPod gives off a magnetic field). This may interfere ! Insert the plus and minus sides of the
and running in no time.
touch, iPhone or iPad by downloading a with the sound. batteries properly according to the marks in
Pioneer original application (iControlAV2) from the battery case.
the iTunes Store.
6 En

Before you start 01

! Batteries with the same shape may have instructions on the screen to make the connec- this CD-ROM with a DVD player or music Wiring Navi only starts up automatically the
different voltages. Do not use different tions and settings. CD player can damage speakers or cause first time AVNavigator is launched.
batteries together. There are also other features enabling easy use impaired hearing due to the large volume. 2 Select and use the desired function.
! When disposing of used batteries, please of various functions, including an Interactive License AVNavigator includes the following functions:
comply with governmental regulations or Manual that operates in association with the ! Please agree to the “Terms of Use” indicated ! Wiring Navi – Guides you through
environmental public instruction’s rules that receiver, updating of various types of software, below before using this CD-ROM. Do not use if connections and initial settings in dialog
apply in your country or area. and MCACC Application that lets you check the you are unwilling to consent to the terms of its fashion. High precision initial settings can be
MCACC measurement results on 3D graphs. use. made easily.
Also agree to the “License Agreement” ! Interactive Manual – Automatically displays
Operating range of remote Installing AVNavigator displayed when installing AVNavigator. the pages explaining the functions that have
control unit Terms of Use been operated on the receiver. It is also
1 Load the included AVNavigator
The remote control may not work properly if: ! Copyright to data provided on this CD-ROM possible to operate the receiver from the
CD-ROM into your computer’s CD drive. Interactive Manual.
! There are obstacles between the remote belongs to PIONEER CORPORATION.
! The installation screen is displayed. Proceed
control and the receiver’s remote sensor. Unauthorized transfer, duplication, broadcast, ! Glossary – Displays glossary pages.
to step 2.
! Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining public transmission, translation, sales, ! MCACC Appli – Displays Advanced
! If the installation screen does not appear,
onto the remote sensor. lending or other such matters that go beyond MCACC measurement results vividly on the
double-click on the CD-ROM icon then start
! The receiver is located near a device that is the scope of “personal use” or “citation” as computer.
the installer (AVNV_XXX_xxx.exe).
emitting infrared rays. defined by Copyright Law may be subject There are special operating instructions
! The receiver is operated simultaneously with 2 Follow the instructions on the screen to punitive actions. Permission to use this for MCACC Application. These instructions
another infrared remote control unit. to install. CD-ROM is granted under license by PIONEER are included in the AVNavigator
When “Finish” is selected, installation is CORPORATION. Interactive Manual’s menus. Refer to them
completed. when using MCACC Application.
General Disclaimer ! Software Update – Allows various types of
3 Remove the included AVNavigator ! PIONEER CORPORATION does not
CD-ROM from the computer’s CD drive. software to be updated.
guarantee the operation of this CD-ROM with ! Settings – Used to make various
respect to personal computers using any AVNavigator settings.
Handling the CD-ROM of the applicable OS. In addition, PIONEER ! Detection – Used to detect the receiver.
Operating Environment CORPORATION is not liable for any damages
30°
30° ! This CD-ROM can be used with Microsoft® incurred as a result of use of this CD-ROM
and is not responsible for any compensation. Note
Windows® XP/Vista/7.
The names of private corporations, products To use the AVNavigator of another model, first
! A browser is at times used for AVNavigator
and other entities described herein are the uninstall (delete) this receiver’s AVNavigator,
7 m (23 ft.) functions. The supported browser is Microsoft
registered trademarks or trademarks of their then install the AVNavigator of the other model.
Internet Explorer 6, 7 and 8. With other
browsers, some functions may be limited or respective firms.
Deleting the AVNavigator
the display may not appear properly.
About using AVNavigator Also, even with a supported browser, Using AVNavigator You can use the following method to uninstall
(included CD-ROM) depending on the browser’s settings, some (delete) the AVNavigator from your PC.
functions may be limited and the display may 1 Click [AVNavigator] on the desktop to
The included AVNavigator CD-ROM contains % Delete from the Control Panel of the
not appear properly. launch AVNavigator.
Wiring Navi allowing you to easily make the PC.
AVNavigator is launched and Wiring Navi
receiver’s connections and initial settings in Precautions For Use From the Start menu, click “Program”
starts up. The language selection screen
dialog fashion. High precision initial settings ! This CD-ROM is for use with a personal d “PIONEER CORPORATION” d
appears. Follow the instructions on the screen
can be completed easily simply by following the computer. It cannot be used with a DVD “AVNavigator(VSX-53 or VSX-52)” d “Uninstall”.
to make the connections and automatic
player or music CD player. Attempting to play settings.
En 7

02 Controls and displays

Controls and displays 8 i/j/k/l/ENTER
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your
! A.ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an
analog input signal to prevent distortion
surround sound system (see page 62) and the (page 54).
Audio or Video options (page 50 or 52). ! DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display
The remote has been conveniently color-coded (page 54).
Remote control according to component control using the follow- 9 Receiver Control buttons
This section explains how to operate the remote ing system: Press first to access: 10 MULTI-ZONE select buttons
control for the receiver. ! White – Receiver control, TV control ! AUTO/ALC/DIRECT – Switches between Switch to perform operations in ZONE 2 and
! Blue – Other controls (See pages 30, 31, 33, 35 Auto Surround (page 37), Auto Level Control, ZONE 3 (page 53).
RECEIVER MULTI
OPERATION
SOURCE
and 59.) Optimum Surround mode and Stream Direct ZONE 3 function is only provided on the VSX-53.
1 mode (page 38). ZONE 3 button cannot be used on the VSX-52.
2,3
RCU SETUP
11 1 u RECEIVER
BDR ! STEREO – Press to select stereo playback 11 Remote control LED
BD DVD DVR HDMI This switches between standby and on for this mode (page 37).
SAT
receiver. Lights when a command is sent from the
4 TV CD HMG ADPT
! STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding remote control.
USB
iPod TUNER SIRIUS
OPTION

12 2 MULTI OPERATION and to switch various modes (2 Pro Logic,
INPUT SELECT TV CTRL RECEIVER Use this button to perform multi operations Neo:6, etc.) (page 37).
12 OPTION
13 (page 58). ! ADV SURR – Use to switch between the
The preset codes of desired devices can be
5 MASTER
registered in the remote control and button
INPUT VOLUME
3 RCU SETUP various surround modes (page 38).
operations can be registered using the learning
TV CONTROL
14 Use to input the preset code when making ! THX – Press to select a Home THX listening
6 mode (page 38).
mode.
CH VOL MUTE remote control settings and to set the remote
15 control mode (page 56). ! PHASE CTRL – Press to switch on/off Phase 13
AUDIO
PARAMETER
VIDEO
PARAMETER Control (page 39). Switches the remote to control the receiver
7 LIST TUNE TOOLS 4 Input function buttons On the VSX-53, Full Band Phase Control can (used to select the white commands).
TOP MENU T.EDIT
Press to select control of other components Switch to perform operations in the main zone.
8
BAND GUIDE
also be switched (page 39).
(page 56). Also use this button to set up surround sound.
PRESET ENTER PRESET
! STATUS – Press to check selected receiver
Use INPUT SELECT c/ d to select the input
CATEGORY RETURN settings (page 55). 14 MASTER VOLUME +/–
function (page 30).
HOME
MENU TUNE ! PQLS – Press to select the PQLS setting Use to set the listening volume.
iPod CTRL
AUTO / ALC / PGM MEMORY MENU 5 TV CTRL (page 48).
DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR

Set the preset code of your TV’s manufacturer 15 MUTE
HDD DVD
! HDMI OUT – Switch the HDMI output
THX PHASE CTRL STATUS
when controlling the TV (page 56). Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has
terminal (page 54).
been muted (adjusting the volume also restores
TV / DTV MPX PQLS
6 TV CONTROL buttons This function is only provided on the VSX-53.
9 the sound).
HDMI OUT AUDIO
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV It cannot be used on the VSX-52.
1 2 3
SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP INFO assigned to the TV CTRL button. ! SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal 16 LIGHT
4 5 6 DISP (page 39). Press to turn on/off the illumination for the
7 Receiver setting buttons
! MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC buttons.
CH LEVEL A.ATT DIMMER
7 8 9
Press first to access:
D.ACCESS CLASS CH
presets (page 39). The way the buttons light can be selected from
/ CLR 0 ENTER
! AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the
! SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep four modes (page 58).
10
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 LIGHT
Audio options (page 50).
mode and select the amount of time before
! VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the
sleep (page 54).
Video options (page 52).
! CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a
! HOME MENU – Use to access the Home
RECEIVER channel, then use k/l to adjust the level
Menu (pages 26, 28, 47, 62 and 69).
(page 70).
! RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the
current menu screen.

8 En

Controls and displays 02

7 (PHASE CONTROL) 17 Matrix decoding format indicators
Display Lights when the Phase Control (page 39) or Full ! 2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2
Band Phase Control (page 39) is switched on. Pro Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Full Band Phase Control is only apply to the 37).
AUTO L C R 2DIGITAL PLUS DSD PCM FULL BAND TUNED VSX-53. ! Neo:6 – When one of the Neo:6 modes of the
2TrueHD MULTI-ZONE PQLS ALC ATT STEREO
HDMI SL SR DTS HD ES 96/24 S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX OVER MONO dB
receiver is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6
DIGITAL XL XC XR 8 Analog signal indicators processing (page 37).
ANALOG LFE MSTR CD TUNER SIRIUS DVD TV VIDEO HMG USB Light to indicate reducing the level of an analog
AUTO SURROUND iPod BD DVR HDMI [ 2 ] [ 3 ] [ 4 ]
signal (page 54). 18 S.RTRV
STREAM DIRECT
2PROLOGIC x Neo:6 Lights when the Auto Sound Retriever function
THX ADV.SURROUND
STANDARD
9 SOUND is active (page 50).
SP AB SLEEP Lights when the DIALOG E (Dialog
6 15 16 17 18 19 20 Enhancement) or TONE (tone controls) features 19 Character display
is selected (page 50). Displays various system information.
1 Signal indicators ! 96/24 – Lights with DTS 96/24 decoding. 10 Tuner indicators 20 Remote control mode indicator
Light to indicate the currently selected input ! DSD PCM – Light during DSD (Direct Stream ! TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being Lights to indicate the receiver’s remote control
signal. AUTO lights when the receiver is set to Digital) to PCM conversion with SACDs. received. mode setting. (Not displayed when set to 1.)
select the input signal automatically (page 39). ! PCM – Lights during playback of PCM ! STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM (page 74)
2 Program format indicators signals. broadcast is being received in auto stereo
Light to indicate the channels to which digital ! MSTR – Lights during playback of DTS-HD mode.
signals are being input. Master Audio signals. ! MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set
! L/R – Left front/Right front channel 4 MULTI-ZONE using MPX.
! C – Center channel Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active 11
! SL/SR – Left surround/Right surround (page 53). Lights when the sound is muted.
channel 5 FULL BAND
! LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the (( )) 12 Master volume level
VSX-53 only: Lights when the Full Band Phase Shows the overall volume level.
indicators light when an LFE signal is being Control is switched on (page 39).
input) “---” indicates the minimum level, and “+12dB”
! XL/XR – Two channels other than the ones 6 Listening mode indicators indicates the maximum level.
above ! AUTO SURROUND – Lights when the Auto 13 Input function indicators
! XC – Either one channel other than the ones Surround feature is switched on (page 37). Light to indicate the input function you have
above, the mono surround channel or matrix ! ALC – Lights when the ALC (Auto level selected.
encode flag control) mode is selected (page 37).
! STREAM DIRECT – Lights when Direct/Pure 14 Scroll indicators
3 Digital format indicators Direct is selected (page 38). Light when there are more selectable items
Light when a signal encoded in the correspond- ! ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of when making the various settings.
ing format is detected. the Advanced Surround modes has been 15 Speaker indicators
! 2 DIGITAL – Lights with Dolby Digital selected (page 38). Lights to indicate the current speaker system
decoding. ! STANDARD – Lights when one of the using SPEAKERS (page 53).
! 2 DIGITAL PLUS – Lights with Dolby Digital Standard Surround modes is switched on 16 SLEEP
Plus decoding. (page 37). Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page
! 2 TrueHD – Lights with Dolby TrueHD ! THX – Lights when one of the Home THX 54).
decoding. modes is selected (page 38).
! DTS – Lights with DTS decoding.
! DTS HD – Lights with DTS-HD decoding.
En 9

02 Controls and displays

5 Remote sensor ! STANDARD SURROUND – Press for
Front panel Receives the signals from the remote control Standard decoding and to switch various
(page 7). modes (2 Pro Logic, Neo:6, Stereo etc.)
1 2 3 4 3 5 6 (page 37).
6 MASTER VOLUME dial
! ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch
7 Front panel controls between the various surround modes (page
To access the front panel controls, catch the 38).
sides of the door with your fingers and pull ! HOME THX – Press to select a Home THX
ADVANCED
MCACC FL OFF HDMI iPod iPhone iPad
forward. listening mode (page 38).
15 HOME MENU
Use to access the Home Menu (page 26, 28, 47,
INPUT MASTER
62 and 69).
SELECTOR VOLUME

INPU
SELET
CTOR

STAN
DBY
16 RETURN
Press to confirm and exit the current menu
/ON

STANDBY/ON

screen.
MAST
VOLU ER
ME

17 TUNER controls
! BAND – Switches between AM and FM radio
bands (page 33).
8 AUDIO PARAMETER ! TUNER EDIT – Use with TUNE i/j, PRESET
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Use to access the Audio options (page 50). k/l and ENTER to memorize and name
9 i/j/k/l (TUNE/PRESET) /ENTER stations for recall (page 33).
AUDIO VIDEO
PARAMETER PARAMETER MULTI-ZONE iPod iPhone iPad AUTO SURR/ALC/ ADVANCED STANDARD
TUNE SPEAKERS CONTROL ON/OFF DIRECT CONTROL STREAM DIRECT SURROUND SURROUND HOME THX
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your 18 PHONES jack
Home Menu. Use TUNE i/j to find radio fre- Use to connect headphones. When the head-
7 PRESET
ENTER
PRESET
BAND
quencies and use PRESET k/l to find preset phones are connected, there is no sound output
PHONES MCACC
5V
USB
2.1 A
HDMI 3 INPUT
stations (page 33). from the speakers.
TUNER EDIT SETUP MIC

10 VIDEO PARAMETER
HOME MENU RETURN
19 MCACC SETUP MIC jack
TUNE
iPod iPhone iPad Use to access the Video options (page 52). Use to connect the supplied microphone (page
11 SPEAKERS 26).
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Use to change the speaker terminal (page 53). 20 iPod iPhone iPad USB terminals
12 MULTI-ZONE controls Use to connect your Apple iPod/iPhone/iPad as
1 u STANDBY/ON ! FL OFF – Lights when “off” (nothing an audio and video source (page 23), or con-
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (page
This switches between standby and on for this displayed) is selected with the display’s nect a USB device for audio and photo playback
21) use these controls to control the sub zone
receiver. dimmer adjustment (page 54). (page 23).
from the main zone (page 53).
2 INPUT SELECTOR dial ! HDMI – Blinks when connecting an HDMI-
13 iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL 21 HDMI input connector
Use to select an input function. equipped component; lights when the
Change the receiver’s input to the iPod and Use for connection to a compatible HDMI
component is connected (page 17).
3 Indicators enable iPod operations on the iPod (page 31). device (Video camera, etc.) (page 23).
! iPod iPhone iPad – Lights to indicate iPod/
! ADVANCED MCACC – Lights when EQ is iPhone/iPad is connected (page 23). 14 Listening mode buttons
set to ON in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu
4 Character display ! AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT –
(page 50).
See Display on page 9 . Switches between Auto Surround (page 37),
Auto Level Control, Optimum Surround mode
and Stream Direct mode (page 38).
10 En

Connecting your equipment 03

Connecting your equipment
VSX-52
IN 1 IN 2 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 OUT DC OUTPUT ADAPTER PORT
(VIDEO) BD IN (DVD) (DVR/BDR) (OUTPUT 5 V
HDMI for WIRELESS LAN LAN AC IN
ASSIGNABLE
(OUTPUT
(10/100) 0.1 A MAX)
5V
1 6 0.6 A MAX)
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO SIRIUS COAXIAL OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

Connecting your equipment
Y PB PR MONITOR IN IN 1 IN 2 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT
IN 1 OUT (DVD) (CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO)
(DVD)
VIDEO
IN 2

This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This (DVR/
BDR) ZONE 2
OUT
DVD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
VIDEO
IN
DVR/BDR
OUT IN
CD
IN FRONT 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW
(Single) PRE OUT

chapter explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system. AUDIO L

MONITOR
OUT
R

CENTER
ANTENNA
CAUTION RS-232C AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS A R FRONT L CENTER R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE / B
R L

Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord
from the power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step. IN IR 1

IN OUT
OUT
2

Important
(OUTPUT 5 V CONTROL (OUTPUT 12 V
150 mA MAX) TOTAL 150 mA MAX)
EXTENSION 12 V TRIGGER

Illustration shows the VSX-53, however connections for the VSX-52 are the same except where
noted.
Note
! The input functions below are assigned by default to the receiver’s different input terminals. Refer to
Rear panel The Input Setup menu on page 28 to change the assignments if other connections are used.
VSX-53
Input Terminals
IN 1 IN 2 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 OUT 1 ADAPTER PORT Input function
HDMI Digital Component
(VIDEO) (DVD) (DVR/BDR) DC OUTPUT
HDMI BD IN (OUTPUT 5 V
(CONTROL) OUT 2 for WIRELESS LAN
(OUTPUT
LAN 0.1 A MAX) AC IN
ASSIGNABLE 5V
(10/100)
1 6 0.6 A MAX)
COMPONENT VIDEO SIRIUS COAXIAL OPTICAL
BD (BD)
ASSIGNABLE
(DVD)

IN 2
VIDEO
DVD IN 5 COAX-1 IN 1
(DVR/
BDR) ZONE 2 ZONE 3 DVD TV/SAT VIDEO DVR/BDR CD
OUT OUT IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW
(Single) PRE OUT
L
TV/SAT OPT-1
AUDIO
MONITOR
OUT
R DVR/BDR IN 6 OPT-2 IN 2
CENTER

RS-232C AM LOOP
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS
VIDEO IN 4 OPT-3
A R FRONT L CENTER R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE / B
R L

HDMI 1 IN 1
IN IR 1

IN 1 IN 2 OUT
HDMI 2 IN 2
OUT
2
HDMI 3
(OUTPUT 5 V CONTROL (OUTPUT 12 V IN 3
150 mA MAX)
EXTENSION
TOTAL 150 mA MAX)
12 V TRIGGER
(front panel)
CD COAX-2

! The CU-RF100 omni-directional remote control ANTENN
RS-232C AM LOOP

(separately sold) can be connected to the
RS-232C and EXTENSION terminals. Using
the CU-RF100 lets you display the receiver’s
display information on the remote control
display in your hands and operate it without (OUTPUT 5 V
150 mA MAX)
CO
EXTENSION
worrying about obstacles or the direction in
which the remote control is pointing.
En 11


This plan replaces the left and right front height Front Bi-Amp
Determining the speakers’ FHR speakers shown in [A] with the left and right
application FHL
front wide speakers (FWL/FWR).
R It is not possible to produce sound simultane-
This unit permits you to build various surround R
ously from the front height or front wide speak-
systems, in accordance with the number of
L ers and the surround back speakers.
speakers you have. SW 2 L
C
SR This surround system produces a true-to-life SW 2
! Be sure to connect speakers to the front left SW 1 C
sound over a wider area. SW 1
and right channels (L and R).
! It is also possible to only connect one of the [C] 7.2 channel surround system & Speaker
surround back speakers (SB) or neither. SBR B connection
SL SR
! If you have two subwoofers, the second SBL ! Speaker System setting: Speaker B
subwoofer can be connected to the SL
SUBWOOFER 2 terminal. Connecting two
subwoofers increases the bass sound to
achieve more powerful sound reproduction. In A 7.2 ch surround system connects the left and
R [E] 5.2 channel surround system & ZONE 2
this case, the same sound is output from the right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker
connection (Multi Zone)
two subwoofers. (C), the left and right front height speakers L
! Speaker System setting: ZONE 2
Choose one from Plans [A] to [E] below. (FHL/FHR), the left and right surround speak- R
SW 2 With these connections you can simultaneously
ers (SL/SR), the left and right surround back C
SR L
SW 1 enjoy 5.2-channel surround sound in the main
speakers (SBL/SBR), and the subwoofers (SW 1/
Important zone with stereo playback on another compo-
SW 2).
! The Speaker System setting must be made if nent in ZONE 2. (The selection of input devices
It is not possible to produce sound simultane- SBR
you use any of the connections shown below SL is limited.)
ously from the front height or front wide speak- SBL Speaker B
other than [A] (see Speaker system setting on ers and the surround back speakers.
page 69 ). This surround system produces a more true-to- Main zone
! Sound does not come through simultaneously life sound from above.
R
from the front height, front wide, speaker B With these connections you can simultaneously
[B] 7.2 channel surround system (Front L
and surround back speakers. Output speakers enjoy 5.2-channel surround sound in the main
are different depending on the input signal or wide) zone with stereo playback of the same sound
SW 2
listening mode. ! Speaker System setting: Normal(SB/FW) on the B speakers. The same connections also C
SW 1
allow for 7.2-channel surround sound in the
[A] 7.2 channel surround system (Front
main zone when not using the B speakers.
height)
[D] 5.2 channel surround system & Front SR
*Default setting R
! Speaker System setting: Normal(SB/FH) FWR Bi-amping connection (High quality SL Sub zone
L surround)
! Speaker System setting: Front Bi-Amp
SW 2 SR
C Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for R
SW 1
high sound quality with 5.2-channel surround L
FWL ZONE 2
sound.
SBR
SL
SBL

12 En


! Place the left and right front height speakers ! It is best to angle the speakers towards the
Other speaker connections at least one meter (3.3 ft.) directly above the listening position. The angle depends on Connecting the speakers
! Your favorite speaker connections can be left and right front speakers. the size of the room. Use less of an angle for Each speaker connection on the receiver com-
selected even if you have fewer than 5.2 bigger rooms. prises a positive (+) and negative (–) terminal.
speakers (except front left/right speakers). ! Surround and surround back speakers
THX speaker system setup Make sure to match these up with the terminals
! When not connecting a subwoofer, connect should be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm (2 ft. to on the speakers themselves.
speakers with low frequency reproduction If you are using a THX certified subwoofer, use
3 ft.) higher than your ears and tilted slightly
capabilities to the front channel. (The the THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your
downward. Make sure the speakers don’t
subwoofer’s low frequency component subwoofer has one) or switch the filter position
face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers
CAUTION
is played from the front speakers, so the to THX on your subwoofer. ! These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS
should be more directly behind the listener
speakers could be damaged.) See also THX Audio Setting on page 71 to make LIVE voltage. To prevent the risk of electric
than for home theater playback.
! After connecting, be sure to conduct the the settings that will give you the best sound shock when connecting or disconnecting the
! Try not to place the surround speakers farther
Full Auto MCACC (speaker environment experience when using the Home THX modes speaker cables, disconnect the power cord
away from the listening position than the front
setting) procedure. See Automatically (page 38). before touching any uninsulated parts.
and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the
conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto ! Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is
surround sound effect.
MCACC) on page 26 . Some tips for improving sound twisted together and inserted fully into the
quality speaker terminal. If any of the bare speaker
wire touches the back panel it may cause the
Where you put your speakers in the room has power to cut off as a safety measure.
Placing the speakers a big effect on the quality of the sound. The
Refer to the chart below for placement of the following guidelines should help you to get the
speakers you intend to connect. best sound from your system.
Bare wire connections
! The subwoofer can be placed on the floor.
SW 1 SW 2 Ideally, the other speakers should be at about CAUTION
FHL FHR
C ear-level when you’re listening to them. Make sure that all speakers are securely
L R Putting the speakers on the floor (except the installed. This not only improves sound quality,
subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a but also reduces the risk of damage or injury
FWL 30 30 FWR wall is not recommended. resulting from speakers being knocked over or
60 60 ! For the best stereo effect, place the front falling in the event of external shocks such as
speakers 2 m to 3 m (6 ft. to 9 ft.) apart, at earthquakes.
equal distance from the TV.
120 120 ! If you’re going to place speakers around your 1 Twist exposed wire strands together.
SL SR 2 Loosen terminal and insert exposed
60 CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the
speakers at a sufficient distance from your wire.
SBL SB SBR CRT TV. 3 Tighten terminal.
! If you’re using a center speaker, place the
front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place 1 2 3
! Place the surround speakers at 120º from them at a narrower angle.
10 mm (3/ 8 in.)
the center. If you, (1) use the surround ! Place the center speaker above or below the
back speaker, and, (2) don’t use the front TV so that the sound of the center channel is
height speakers / front wide speakers, we localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the
recommend placing the surround speaker center speaker does not cross the line formed
right beside you. by the leading edge of the front left and right
! If you intend to connect only one surround speakers.
back speaker, place it directly behind you.
En 13


Note Installing your speaker system
! Please refer to the manual that came with At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround
your speakers for details on how to connect speakers should always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back
the other end of the speaker cables to your speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left surround back terminal).
speakers.
! Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer. Standard surround connection
It is not possible to connect using speaker
cables. The front height terminals can also be used for the front wide and Speaker B speakers.
! If you have two subwoofers, the second
Front height setting
subwoofer can be connected to the
Front height right Front height left
SUBWOOFER 2 terminal. Connecting two Front wide setting
subwoofers increases the bass sound to Front wide right Front wide left
achieve more powerful sound reproduction. In Speaker B setting
this case, the same sound is output from the Speaker B - right Speaker B - left
two subwoofers.
Front right Subwoofer 1 Center Subwoofer 2 Front left

Banana plug connections
LINE LEVEL LINE LEVEL
If you want to use speaker cables terminated INPUT INPUT
with banana plugs, screw the speaker terminal
fully shut, then plug the banana plug into the
end of the speaker terminal. IN 4 IN 5 IN 6
IN 1 IN 2 OUT 1 DC OUTPUT ADAPTER PORT
(VIDEO) BD IN (DVD) (DVR/BDR) (OUTPUT 5 V
HDMI (CONTROL) OUT 2 for WIRELESS LAN LAN AC IN
ASSIGNABLE
(OUTPUT
(10/100) 0.1 A MAX)
5V
1 6 0.6 A MAX)
(DVD)
VIDEO
IN 2
(DVR/
OUT OUT IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW PRE OUT
(Single)

L
AUDIO
MONITOR
OUT
R

CENTER
ANTENNA
RS-232C AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS A R FRONT L CENTER R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE / B
R L

IN IR 1

IN 1 IN 2 OUT
OUT
2


The surround back terminals can also be used for ZONE 2.

5.2 ch surround setting
Not connected Not connected
Not connected Surround back
Surround right Surround left
Surround back right Surround back left
ZONE 2 setting
ZONE 2 - Right ZONE 2 - Left

14 En


Bi-amping your speakers Bi-wiring your speakers Selecting the Speaker system
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver and low frequency driver of your speakers Your speakers can also be bi-wired if they sup- The front height terminals can be used for front
to different amplifiers for better crossover performance. Your speakers must be bi-ampable to do port bi-amping. wide and Speaker B connections, in addition to
this (having separate terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement will depend on the ! With these connections, the Speaker System for the front height speakers. Also, the surround
kind of speakers you’re using. setting makes no difference. back terminals can be used for bi-amping and
Front right Front left ZONE 2 connections, in addition to for the sur-
CAUTION round back speakers. Make this setting accord-
Bi-amp compatible Bi-amp compatible
! Don’t connect different speakers from the ing to the application.
speaker High High speaker
same terminal in this way.
Center ! When bi-wiring as well, heed the cautions for Front height setup
Low Low
bi-amping shown above.
*Default setting
% To bi-wire a speaker, connect two
1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front
speaker cords to the speaker terminal on
height speaker terminals.
the receiver.
HDMI
IN 1 IN 2 IN 4
(VIDEO) BD IN
IN 5
(DVD)
IN 6
(DVR/BDR) OUT 1 DC OUTPUT ADAPTER PORT
(OUTPUT 5 V See Standard surround connection on page 14 .
Using a banana plug for the second connection
(OUTPUT
ASSIGNABLE 5V
(10/100)
1 6 0.6 A MAX)
COMPONENT VIDEO SIRIUS COAXIAL OPTICAL
2 If necessary, select ‘Normal(SB/FH)’
ASSIGNABLE

IN 1
Y PB PR MONITOR
OUT
IN
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1
(DVD)
IN 2
(CD)
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 IN 2 IN 3
(TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO)
OUT
is recommended.
from the Speaker System menu.
(DVD)
VIDEO
IN 2
(DVR/

See Speaker system setting on page 69 to do
(Single)

L
AUDIO
MONITOR
OUT
R this.
CENTER
ANTENNA
R L

Front wide setup
IN IR 1

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front
IN 1 IN 2 OUT
OUT
2

(OUTPUT 5 V
150 mA MAX)
EXTENSION
CONTROL (OUTPUT 12 V
TOTAL 150 mA MAX)
12 V TRIGGER
See Standard surround connection on page 14 .
2 Select ‘Normal(SB/FW)’ from the
Subwoofer 1 Surround right Surround left Subwoofer 2
Speaker System menu.
this.
CAUTION
! Most speakers with both High and Low terminals have two metal plates that connect the High
Speaker B setup
to the Low terminals. These must be removed when you are bi-amping the speakers or you could
severely damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for more information. You can listen to stereo playback in another
! If your speakers have a removable crossover network, make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. room.
Doing so may damage your speakers. 1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front
See Standard surround connection on page 14 .
2 Select ‘Speaker B’ from the
Speaker System menu.
this.

En 15


Terminal for connection
Bi-Amping setup About the audio connection
Terminal for connection with
source device with TV monitor About HDMI
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed

High picture quality
high sound quality with 5.2-channel surround Types of cables and Transferable audio HDMI IN HDMI OUT digital video, as well as almost every kind of
sound. terminals signals
digital audio.
1 Connect bi-amp compatible speakers HDMI HD audio
Y PB PR Y PB PR
This receiver incorporates High-Definition
to the front and surround back speaker COMPONENT COMPONENT VIDEO Multimedia Interface (HDMI®) technology.

Sound signal priority
VIDEO IN MONITOR OUT
terminals. This receiver supports the functions described
See Bi-amping your speakers on page 15 . Digital (Coaxial) Conventional digital audio below through HDMI connections.
2 Select ‘Front Bi-Amp’ from the
VIDEO IN VIDEO
MONITOR OUT ! Digital transfer of uncompressed video
Speaker System menu. Video signals can be output (contents protected by HDCP (1080p/24,
Digital (Optical) 1080p/60, etc.))
this. ! 3D signal transfer
Note ! Deep Color signal transfer
RCA (Analog) Conventional analog audio ! If the video signal does not appear on your ! x.v.Color signal transfer
ZONE 2 setup (White/Red) ! ARC (Audio Return Channel)
TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on
With these connections you can simultaneously your component or display. Note that some ! Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital
enjoy 5.2-channel surround sound in the main components (such as video game units) have audio signals (192 kHz or less) for up to 8
zone with stereo playback on another compo- resolutions that may not be converted. In this channels
nent in ZONE 2. case, try switching Digital Video Conversion ! Input of the following digital audio formats:
1 Connect a pair of speakers to the ! With an HDMI cable, video and audio signals (in Setting the Video options on page 52 ) OFF. — Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High
surround back speaker terminals. can be transferred in high quality over a single ! The signal input resolutions that can be bitrate audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master
See Standard surround connection on page 14 . cable. converted from the component video input Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio),
for the HDMI output are 480i/576i, 480p/576p, DVD-Audio, CD, SACD (DSD signal), Video
2 Select ‘ZONE 2’ from the CD, Super VCD
720p and 1080i. 1080p signals cannot be
Speaker System menu. About the video converter ! Synchronized operation with components
converted.
See Speaker system setting on page 69 to do using the Control with HDMI function (see
The video converter ensures that all video ! Only signals with an input resolution
this. Control with HDMI function on page 47 )
sources are output through all of the MONITOR of 480i/576i can be converted from the
VIDEO OUT jacks. The only exception is HDMI: component video input for the composite
since this resolution cannot be downsampled, MONITOR OUT terminals. Note
you must connect your monitor/TV to the ! For optimal video performance, THX ! An HDMI connection can only be made
receiver’s HDMI output when connecting this recommends switching Digital Video with DVI-equipped components compatible
video source. Conversion (in Setting the Video options on with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital
If several video components are assigned to page 52 ) OFF. Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to
the same input function (see The Input Setup connect to a DVI connector, you will need a
menu on page 28 ), the converter gives priority This item incorporates copy protection technol-
separate adaptor (DVIdHDMI) to do so. A DVI
to HDMI, component, then composite (in that ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other
connection, however, does not support audio
order). intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation.
signals. Consult your local audio dealer for
Reverse engineering and disassembly are
more information.
prohibited.

16 En


! If you connect a component that
is not compatible with HDCP, an Connecting your TV and playback components
HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the
front panel display. Some components that
Connecting using HDMI
are compatible with HDCP still cause this
message to be displayed, but so long as there If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component (Blu-ray Disc player (BD), etc.), you
is no problem with displaying video this is not can connect it to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable.
a malfunction. If the TV and playback components support the Control with HDMI feature, the convenient Control
! Depending on the component you have with HDMI functions can be used (see Control with HDMI function on page 47 ).
connected, using a DVI connection may result
HDMI/DVI-compatible
in unreliable signal transfers. Other HDMI/DVI-
Blu-ray Disc player
equipped component
! This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital
HDMI/DVI-compatible
Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master monitor
Audio. To take advantage of these formats,
however, make sure that the component HDMI OUT HDMI OUT
Select one
connected to this receiver also supports the HDMI IN
DIGITAL OUT AUDIO OUT
COAXIAL OPTICAL R ANALOG L
corresponding format.
! Use a High Speed HDMI® cable. If an HDMI
cable other than a High Speed HDMI® cable is This connection is
required in order to
used, it may not work properly. listen to the sound
! When an HDMI cable with a built-in equalizer of the TV over the
receiver.
is connected, it may not operate properly. HDMI
IN 1 IN 2 IN 4
(VIDEO) BD IN
IN 5
(DVD)
IN 6
(DVR/BDR) OUT 1
(CONTROL) OUT 2
DC OUTPUT
for WIRELESS LAN LAN
ADAPTE
(OUTPU

! Signal transfer is only possible when
ASSIGNABLE
(OUTPUT
(10/100) 0.1 A
5V
1 6 0.6 A MAX)

connected to a compatible component.
(DVD)

! HDMI format digital audio transmissions
VIDEO
IN 2
(DVR/

require a longer time to be recognized. Due to
(Single)

L
AUDIO

this, interruption in the audio may occur when MONITOR
OUT
R

switching between audio formats or beginning RS-232C AM LOOP
ANTENNA
CENTER

A R FRONT L CENTER R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE

playback. R

! Turning on/off the device connected to this IN IR 1

unit’s HDMI OUT terminal during playback, OUT
IN 1 IN 2 OUT
2

or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI (OUTPUT 5 V
150 mA MAX)
TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

cable during playback, may cause noise or EXTENSION 12 V TRIGGER

interrupted audio.
! VSX-53 only: When connecting to an HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor using the HDMI OUT 2
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition terminal, switch the HDMI output setting to HDMI OUT 2 or HDMI OUT ALL. See Switching the
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or regis- HDMI output on page 54 .
tered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the ! For input components, connections other than HDMI connections are also possible (see
United States and other countries. Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output on page 18 ).
! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio
cables.
“x.v.Color” and are trade-
— When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC
marks of Sony Corporation.
(Audio Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT
terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI Setup
to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on page 47 ).
En 17


Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output Connecting your TV with no HDMI input
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback com- This diagram shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback
ponent with no HDMI output) to the receiver. component) to the receiver.
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor
! With these connections, the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected with
DVD player, etc.
an HDMI cable. Connect the receiver and TV using the same type of video cable as used to connect
the receiver and player.

DVD player, etc.
Select one Select one
AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
HDMI IN R ANALOG L COAXIAL OPTICAL VIDEO
PR PB Y
TV

Select one Select one Select one
VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT AUDIO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO IN COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
PR PB Y VIDEO VIDEO COAXIAL OPTICAL R ANALOG L
PR PB Y

IN 1 IN 2 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 ADAPTER PORT
(VIDEO) (DVD) (DVR/BDR) OUT 1 DC OUTPUT
HDMI BD IN (OUTPUT 5 V
(OUTPUT
ASSIGNABLE 5V
(10/100)
1 6 0.6 A MAX)
(DVD)
VIDEO
IN 2
(DVR/
(Single)

L
AUDIO
IN 1 IN 2 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 OUT 1 DC OUTPUT ADAPTER PORT
MONITOR
(VIDEO) (DVD) (DVR/BDR) (OUTPUT 5 V
OUT
R
HDMI BD IN (CONTROL) OUT 2 for WIRELESS LAN LAN
ASSIGNABLE
(OUTPUT
(10/100) 0.1 A MAX)
5V
1 6 0.6 A MAX)
CENTER
ANTENNA ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO SIRIUS COAXIAL OPTICAL
RS-232C AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS Y PB PR
A R FRONT L CENTER R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE / B MONITOR IN IN 1 IN 2 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT
R L IN 1 OUT (DVD) (CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO)
(DVD)
VIDEO
IN 2
(DVR/
IR BDR) ZONE 2 ZONE 3 DVD TV/SAT VIDEO DVR/BDR CD
IN 1 OUT OUT IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW
(Single) PRE OUT
IN 1 IN 2 OUT L
OUT AUDIO
2
MONITOR
OUT
R
150 mA MAX) TOTAL 150 mA MAX) CENTER
EXTENSION 12 V TRIGGER ANTENNA
R L

! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio IN IR 1

cables (page 17). OUT
IN 1 IN 2 OUT
2

— When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC (OUTPUT 5 V
150 mA MAX)
TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

(Audio Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT EXTENSION 12 V TRIGGER

terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI Setup
to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on page 47 ). ! Connect using an HDMI cable to listen to HD audio on the receiver. Do not use an HDMI cable to
! If you use an optical digital audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you input video signals.
connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 28 ). Depending on the video component, it may not be possible to output signals connected by HDMI
and other methods simultaneously, and it may be necessary to make output settings. Please refer
to the operating instructions supplied with your component for more information.
! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio
cables (page 17).
! If you use an optical digital audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you
connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 28 ).
18 En


Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder and other video Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box
sources Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top
This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and outputs suitable for connecting analog or digi- boxes’.
tal video devices, including HDD/DVD recorders and BD recorders. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder box to (see The Input Setup menu on page 28 ).
to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 28 ). STB
HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc.

Select one
VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT
VIDEO R ANALOG L COAXIAL OPTICAL
Select one
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT DIGITAL OUT AUDIO OUT
R ANALOG L VIDEO VIDEO COAXIAL OPTICAL R ANALOG L

IN 1 IN 2 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 ADAPTER PORT
(VIDEO) BD IN (DVD) (DVR/BDR) OUT 1 DC OUTPUT
HDMI (OUTPUT 5 V
(OUTPUT
ASSIGNABLE 5V
(10/100)
1 6 0.6 A MAX)
IN 1 IN 2 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 OUT 1 DC OUTPUT ADAPTER PORT Y PB PR
HDMI (VIDEO) BD IN (DVD) (DVR/BDR) (OUTPUT 5 V MONITOR IN IN 1 IN 2 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT
(OUTPUT
LAN 0.1 A MAX) AC IN IN 1 OUT (DVD) (CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO)
ASSIGNABLE 5V
(10/100) (DVD)
1 6 0.6 A MAX) VIDEO
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO SIRIUS COAXIAL OPTICAL IN 2
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE (DVR/
Y PB PR IN IN 1 IN 2 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT CD
MONITOR BDR) ZONE 2 ZONE 3 DVD TV/SAT VIDEO DVR/BDR
IN 1 OUT (DVD) (CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO) OUT OUT IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW PRE OUT
(Single)
(DVD)
VIDEO AUDIO L
IN 2
(DVR/ MONITOR
BDR) ZONE 2 ZONE 3 DVD TV/SAT VIDEO DVR/BDR CD OUT
OUT OUT IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW R
(Single) PRE OUT
L
AUDIO CENTER
ANTENNA
MONITOR
OUT
R R L

CENTER
ANTENNA
RS-232C AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS A R FRONT L CENTER R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE / B IR
R L IN 1

IN 1 IN 2 OUT
OUT
2

IN IR 1
IN 1 IN 2 OUT 150 mA MAX) TOTAL 150 mA MAX)
OUT
2 EXTENSION 12 V TRIGGER

! If your set-top box is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we recommend connecting it to the
receiver’s HDMI IN 1 or IN 2 terminal. When doing so, also connect the receiver and TV by HDMI
! In order to record, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is for playback (see Connecting using HDMI on page 17 ).
only) (page 54).
! If your HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc., is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we
recommend connecting it to the receiver’s HDMI DVR/BDR IN terminal. When doing so, also
connect the receiver and TV by HDMI (see Connecting using HDMI on page 17 ).

En 19


Connecting other audio components Connecting additional amplifiers
This receiver has both digital and analog inputs, allowing you to connect audio components for This receiver has more than enough power for any home use, but it’s possible to add additional
playback. amplifiers to every channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the connections shown below
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the compo- to add amplifiers to power your speakers.
nent to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 28 ).
ANALOG
INPUT
MD, DAT, etc.
L

R Front channel
amplifier
ANALOG
INPUT
Select one
DIGITAL IN AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT
R ANALOG L
Center channel
OPTICAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
amplifier (mono)
ANALOG
INPUT

L

R
Surround
channel amplifier
R OUT 1 DC OUTPUT ADAPTER PORT
(OUTPUT 5 V
(CONTROL) OUT 2 for WIRELESS LAN LAN AC IN
(OUTPUT
5V
(10/100) 0.1 A MAX) ANALOG
IN 1 IN 2 IN 4
(VIDEO) BD IN
IN 5
(DVD)
IN 6
(DVR/BDR) OUT 1 DC OUTPUT ADAPTER PORT 0.6 A MAX) INPUT
HDMI (OUTPUT 5 V SIRIUS COAXIAL OPTICAL
(OUTPUT
LAN 0.1 A MAX) AC IN ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE (10/100)
1 6
5V
0.6 A MAX)
NITOR
UT
IN IN 1
(DVD)
IN 2
(CD)
IN 1 IN 2 IN 3
OUT L
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE VIDEO
IN 1
(DVD)
Y PB PR MONITOR
OUT
IN IN 1
(DVD)
IN 2
(CD)
IN 1 IN 2 IN 3
OUT
R Front height or Front wide
channel amplifier
CD
VIDEO IN FRONT 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW PRE OUT
(Single)
IN 2
(DVR/ L
BDR) ZONE 2 ZONE 3 DVD TV/SAT VIDEO DVR/BDR CD UDIO
(Single) ANALOG
AUDIO L R INPUT
MONITOR CENTER
OUT
R L
CENTER R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE / B
R L
Surround back
CENTER
ANTENNA
RS-232C AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS FRONT CENTER SURROUND R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE / B
R
A R L R L
R L
channel amplifier

IN IR 1 ANALOG
INPUT Powered
IN 1 IN 2 OUT
OUT
2
subwoofer 2
ANALOG
INPUT Powered
! If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the CD subwoofer 1

inputs instead.
! You can’t hear HDMI audio through this receiver’s digital out jack. ! If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front speaker setting (see Speaker Setting on page 66 ) to
LARGE.
! You can use the additional amplifier on the surround back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as
well. In this case plug the amplifier into the left (SURROUND BACK L (Single)) terminal only.
! The sound from the surround back terminals will depend on how you have configured the Speaker
system setting on page 69 .
! If you have two subwoofers, the second subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2
terminal. Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound
reproduction. In this case, the same sound is output from the two subwoofers.
! To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the speaker system to OFF, or simply disconnect any
speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.

20 En


5 Connect the FM wire antenna into the Sub
Connecting AM/FM antennas FM antenna socket. MULTI-ZONE setup Zone
Input functions available
Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire For best results, extend the FM antenna fully This receiver can power up to three (VSX-53)/ DVD, TV/SAT, DVR/BDR, VIDEO, CD,
antenna as shown below. To improve reception and fix to a wall or door frame. Don’t drape two (VSX-52) independent systems in separate ZONE 3 TUNER, ADAPTER PORT
and sound quality, connect external antennas loosely or leave coiled up. rooms after you have made the proper MULTI- (Outputs analog audio)
(see Connecting external antennas on page 21 ). ZONE connections. It is not possible to down-convert the audio
Connecting external antennas Different sources can be playing in three (VSX- and video input signals from the HDMI input
53)/two (VSX-52) zones at the same time or, terminals, digital input terminals (OPTICAL and
1 2 To improve FM reception, connect an external
depending on your needs, the same source can COAXIAL) and the COMPONENT VIDEO input
FM antenna to FM UNBAL 75 W.
also be used. The main and sub zone have inde- terminals and output them to ZONE 2.
pendent power (the main zone power can be off
3 while one (or both) of the sub zones is on) and Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2)
5 ANTENNA
the sub zones can be controlled by the remote
AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 or front panel controls. 1 Connect a separate amplifier to the
75 coaxial cable
4 AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT jacks on this receiver.
ANTENNA You should have a pair of speakers attached to
Important
AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75
the sub zone amplifier as shown in the follow-
The explanations for ZONE 3 below only apply to
a b c ing illustration.
the VSX-53.
2 Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m Making MULTI-ZONE connections ZONE 2 OUT jack on this receiver.
(16 ft. to 20 ft.) length of vinyl-coated wire to the It is possible to make these connections if Sub zone (ZONE 2) Main zone
AM LOOP terminals without disconnecting the you have a separate TV and speakers for your HDMI
IN 1 IN 2 IN 4
(VIDEO) BD IN

1 Pull off the protective shields of both supplied AM loop antenna.
ASSIGNABLE
1 6

primary (ZONE 2) sub zone, and a separate TV VIDEO IN
ASSIGNABLE
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB PR

AM antenna wires. For the best possible reception, suspend hori- and a separate amplifier (and speakers) for your
IN 1
(DVD)

IN 2

2 Push open the tabs, then insert one zontally outdoors. secondary (ZONE 3) sub zone. You will also
(DVR/
BDR) ZONE 2 ZONE 3
OUT OUT
DVD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
V

wire fully into each terminal, then release need a separate amplifier if you are not using MONITOR
OUT

Outdoor antenna
the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires. the MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals RS-232C AM LOOP
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS A

(ZONE 2) on page 21 for your primary sub zone.
3 Fix the AM loop antenna to the Indoor antenna
AUDIO IN

There are two primary sub zone setups possible R L IN IR 1

attached stand. ANTENNA (vinyl-coated wire) OUT
IN 1 IN 2 OUT

with this system. Choose whichever works best
2

To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75
(OUTPUT 5 V
150 mA MAX)

for you.
TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

direction indicated by the arrow (fig. a) then clip
5 m to 6 m
the loop onto the stand (fig. b). (16 ft. to 20 ft.) MULTI-ZONE listening options
! If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a
wall or other surface, secure the stand with The following table shows the signals that can MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker
screws (fig. c) before clipping the loop to the be output to ZONE 2 and ZONE 3:
terminals (ZONE 2)
stand. Make sure the reception is clear. Sub
Input functions available You must select ZONE 2 in Speaker system set-
4 Place the AM antenna on a flat Zone ting on page 69 to use this setup.
surface and in a direction giving the best DVD, TV/SAT, DVR/BDR, VIDEO, 1 Connect a pair of speakers to the
reception. HOME MEDIA GALLERY, iPod/USB,
surround back speaker terminals.
ZONE 2 CD, TUNER, ADAPTER PORT, SIRIUS
(Outputs analog audio, composite
video.)

En 21


2 Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO LAN terminal specifications
ZONE 2 OUT jack on this receiver. Connecting a SiriusConnect Connecting to the network ! LAN terminal : Ethernet jack
Sub zone (ZONE 2) Main zone
Tuner through LAN interface (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)

IN 1 IN 2 DC OUTPUT
To receive SIRIUS Satellite Radio broadcasts, By connecting this receiver to the network via
Note
HDMI

you will need to activate your SiriusConnectTM
OUT 2 LAN
the LAN terminal, you can listen to Internet
for WIRELESS LAN
(OUTPUT
ASSIGNABLE 5V
(10/10
1 6 0.6 A MAX)
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO AXIAL OPTICAL

tuner. radio stations. To listen to Internet radio sta- ! Refer to the operation manual of the
SIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
Y PB PR 1 IN 2 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT
IN 1 D) (CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO)
(DVD)

VIDEO IN
IN 2
(DVR/
BDR) ZONE 2 ZONE 3
UBWOOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW
OUT OUT PRE O
tions, you must sign a contract with an ISP equipment you have as the connected
(Single) IN 6

(Internet Service Provider) beforehand. equipment and connection method may differ
(DVR/BDR) OUT 1 DC OUTPUT
L
(OUTPUT
LAN
MONITOR 5V
(10/100)
OUT 0.6 A MAX)

When connected in this way, you can play audio depending on your Internet environment.
R
SIRIUS COAXIAL OPTICAL
TER ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
ANTENNA MONITOR IN IN 1 IN 2 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT

files stored on the components on the network, ! When using a broadband Internet connection,
RS-232C AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 OUT (DVD) (CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO)
UND L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HE
R
VIDEO

L R
IN IR
/BDR
IN
CD
IN FRONT 1 SUBWOOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW
(Single) PRE OUT
including your computer, using HOME MEDIA a contract with an Internet service provider
GALLERY inputs. is required. For more details, contact your
IN 1 IN L
OUT AUDIO

(OUTPUT 5 V
150 mA MAX)
EXTENSION
CONTROL (OU
TO
CENTER
R
nearest Internet service provider.
T L CENTER R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGH
R DC OUTPUT
for WIRELESS LAN
(OUTPUT
LAN
5V
(10/100)
0.6 A MAX)
L
BLE
IN 2
(CD)
OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 IN 2 IN 3
OUT Connecting optional Bluetooth
Internet
ADAPTER
Secondary MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE OFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW PRE OUT
When the Bluetooth® ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or
(Single)

3)
L

Antenna Modem
R
AS-BT200) is connected to this receiver, a prod-
% Connect a separate amplifier to the SiriusConnectTM SIRIUS H
L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / F
R
uct equipped with Bluetooth wireless technol-
AUDIO ZONE 3 OUT jacks on this receiver. HOME tuner ogy (portable cell phone, digital music player,
You should have a pair of speakers attached to etc.) can be used to listen to music wirelessly.
SIR
the sub zone amplifier as shown in the follow- IU S H
! The Bluetooth wireless technology enabled
ing illustration. device must support A2DP profiles.
Sub zone (ZONE 3) Main zone
LAN
3 2 1 WAN ! Pioneer does not guarantee proper connection
IN 4
AC adapter
Router and operation of this unit with all Bluetooth
wireless technology enabled devices.
IN 1 IN 2 BD IN
HDMI (VIDEO)
ASSIGNABLE

You will also need to connect the antenna and
1 6
ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO
Y PB PR
LAN cable
IN 1
(DVD)
AC adapter to the SiriusConnectTM tuner. Bluetooth® ADAPTER
IN 2
(sold separately)
! For instructions on playing the SIRIUS Radio,
(DVR/
BDR) ZONE 2 ZONE 3 DVD TV/SAT V

to LAN port
OUT OUT IN IN

DC OUTPUT ADAPTER PORT

R
AUDIO IN
L
MONITOR
OUT see Listening to Satellite Radio on page 33 . for WIRELESS LAN
(OUTPUT
5V
0.6 A MAX)
LAN
(10/100)
(OUTPUT 5 V
0.1 A MAX) AC IN

ANTENNA PC N2
OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT
RS-232C AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS A CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO)

IN

IN 1
IR
IN 2 OUT
1 Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to ER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW
(Single) PRE OUT

the LAN terminal on your router (with or with-
OUT
2 L

out the built-in DHCP server function) with a
150 mA MAX) TOTAL 150 mA MAX) R

straight LAN cable (CAT 5 or higher). L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE / B
R L

Turn on the DHCP server function of your
router. In case your router does not have the
built-in DHCP server function, it is necessary
to set up the network manually. For details, see
Network Setup menu on page 71 .

22 En


% Switch the receiver into standby then % Switch the receiver into standby
Important use the supplied iPod cable to connect then connect your USB device to the 2
DC OUTPUT
for WIRELESS LAN
(OUTPUT
LAN
ADAPTER PORT
(OUTPUT 5 V
0.1 A MAX)
(10/100)

! Do not move the receiver with the Bluetooth your iPod to the iPod iPhone iPad USB USB terminal on the front panel of this
5V
0.6 A MAX)
L OPTICAL
BLE ASSIGNABLE

ADAPTER connected. Doing so could cause terminal on the front panel of this receiver.
IN 2 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 OUT
(CD) (TV/SAT) (DVR/BDR) (VIDEO)

Internet
damage or faulty contact. receiver. ! This receiver does not support a USB hub. OOFER 2 SURROUND SURR BACK FH / FW PRE OUT
! It is also possible to connect using the cable ! For instructions on playing the USB device,
(Single)

% Switch the receiver into standby L
Modem
and connect Bluetooth ADAPTER to the included with the iPod, but in this case it is not see Playing a USB device on page 31 . R

ADAPTER PORT. possible to view pictures via the receiver. L R SURROUND BACK L(Single) FRONT HEIGHT / FRONT WIDE / B
R L

! For instructions on playing the Bluetooth ! For the cable connection, also refer to the
wireless technology device, see Pairing the operating instructions for your iPod. Connecting an HDMI-equipped Router
Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless ! For instructions on playing the iPod, see component to the front panel
technology device on page 35 . Playing an iPod on page 30 . input WAN

Connecting an iPod Connecting a USB device iPod iPhone iPad
DIRECT CONTROL
AUTO SURR/ALC/
STREAM DIRECT
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STANDARD
SURROUND HOME THX

This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal It is possible to play audio and photo files by
that will allow you to control playback of audio connecting USB devices to this receiver. It
content from your iPod using the controls of is also possible to connect a USB keyboard USB
DC 5V Ethernet WPS
HDMI 3 INPUT

this receiver. (US-international layout) to the receiver to enter 5V 2.1 A
Wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300)
text in the following GUI screens.
iPod iPhone iPad
! Change the input name in the Input Setup
iPod iPhone iPad
DIRECT CONTROL
AUTO SURR/ALC/
STREAM DIRECT
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STANDARD
SURROUND HOME THX menu (page 28).
! Add names to radio station presets (page 33). Connecting an IR receiver
If you keep your stereo components in a closed
USB HDMI 3 INPUT iPod iPhone iPad AUTO SURR/ALC/ ADVANCED STANDARD cabinet or shelving unit, or you wish to use the
5V 2.1 A DIRECT CONTROL STREAM DIRECT SURROUND SURROUND

Video camera (etc.) sub zone remote control in another zone, you
iPod iPhone iPad
can use an optional IR receiver (such as a Niles
or Xantech unit) to control your system instead
5V
USB
2.1 A
HDMI 3 INPUT of the remote sensor on the front panel of this
iPod Connecting to a wireless LAN receiver.
iPod iPhone iPad
Wireless connection to the network is possible ! Remote operation may not be possible if direct
iPod cable through a wireless LAN connection. Use the light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining
(supplied)
MENU separately sold AS-WL300 for connection. on the IR receiver remote sensor window.
! For instructions on setting the wireless LAN ! Note that other manufacturers may not use
converter, see Network Setup menu on page the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that
71 . came with your component to check for IR
compatibility.
! If using two remote controls (at the same
USB mass
storage device time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes
priority over the remote sensor on the front
USB keyboard
panel.

En 23


1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR IN 4

Operating other Pioneer Switching components on and
IN 1 IN 2
(VIDEO) BD IN

IN jack on the rear of this receiver.
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
1 6

components with this unit’s off using the 12 volt trigger
Y PB PR
IN 1
Closet or shelving unit (DVD)

sensor IN 2
(DVR/
BDR) ZONE 2 ZONE 3 DVD TV/SAT
You can connect components in your system
Pioneer Non-Pioneer OUT OUT IN IN

component component Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL (such as a screen or projector) to this receiver
so that they switch on or off using 12 volt
MONITOR

jacks which can be used to link components
OUT

together so that you can use just the remote RS-232C AM LOOP
ANTENNA
triggers when you select an input function.
CONTROL IR
sensor of one component. When you use a However, you must specify which input func-
IN OUT IN remote control, the control signal is passed IN IR 1 tions switch on the trigger using the The Input
Setup menu on page 28 . Note that this will only
IN 1 IN 2 OUT

along the chain to the appropriate component.
OUT
2

IN 1 IN 2 IN 4
(VIDEO) BD IN
IN 5
(DVD)
! If you want to control all your components (OUTPUT 5 V
150 mA MAX)
TOTAL 150 mA MAX)
work with components that have a standby
HDMI EXTENSION 12 V TRIGGER
ASSIGNABLE
1 6
using this receiver’s remote control, see page mode.

56.
Y PB PR
IN 1
(DVD)

! If you have connected a remote control to the
MONITOR
OUT
IN 2
(DVR/ IN OUT IN OUT
BDR) ZONE 2 ZONE 3 DVD TV/SAT VIDEO DVR/
OUT OUT IN IN IN OUT CONTROL CONTROL
CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), RS-232C AM LOOP
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS A R

you won’t be able to control this unit using the
MONITOR
OUT

RS-232C AM LOOP
ANTENNA
FM UNBAL 75 SPEAKERS FRONT
remote sensor. IN IR 1
A R IN 1 IN 2 OUT
OUT
2

3 Continue the chain in the same way for
(OUTPUT 5 V CONTROL
Important
IR (OUTPUT 12 V
IN 1 150 mA MAX) TOTAL 150 mA MAX)
IN 1 IN 2 OUT 12 V TRIGGER EXTENSION 12 V TRIGGER
INPUT
as many components as you have.
OUT
2
! Note that if you use this feature, make sure
that you also have at least one set of analog

audio, video or HDMI jacks connected to
another component for grounding purposes. % Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack of this
1 Decide which component you want to receiver to the 12 V trigger of another
IR receiver use the remote sensor of. component.
When you want to control any component in the Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end
2 Connect the IR IN jack of another chain, this is the remote sensor at which you’ll for the connection.
component to the IR OUT jack on the rear point the corresponding remote control. After you’ve specified the input functions that
of this receiver to link it to the IR receiver. will switch on the trigger, you’ll be able to
2 Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that
Please see the manual supplied with your IR switch the component on or off just by pressing
component to the CONTROL IN jack of the input function(s) you’ve set on page 28.
receiver for the type of cable necessary for the
another Pioneer component.
connection.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end
! If you want to link a Pioneer component to Note
for the connection.
the IR receiver, see Operating other Pioneer ! VSX-53 only:
components with this unit’s sensor on page It is also possible to have the component
24 to connect to the CONTROL jacks instead switch not when the input function is
of the IR OUT jack. switched, but when HDMI OUT is switched.
For details, see HDMI Setup on page 47 .

24 En


1 Plug the supplied power cord into the
Plugging in the receiver AC IN socket on the back of the receiver.
Only plug in after you have connected all your 2 Plug the other end into a power outlet.
components to this receiver, including the ! After this receiver is connected to an AC
speakers. outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI
initialization process begins. You cannot
CAUTION carry out any operations during this process.
! Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do The HDMI indicator in the front panel display
not pull out the plug by tugging the cord, and blinks during this process, and you can turn
never touch the power cord when your hands on this receiver once it has stopped blinking.
are wet, as this could cause a short circuit or When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF,
electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of you can skip this process. For details about
furniture, or other object on the power cord or the Control with HDMI feature, see Control
pinch the cord in any other way. Never make with HDMI function on page 47 .
a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables.
The power cords should be routed so that they
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged
power cord can cause a fire or give you an
electric shock. Check the power cord once in a
while. If you find it damaged, ask your nearest
Pioneer authorized independent service
company for a replacement.
! Do not use any power cord other than the one
supplied with this unit.
! Do not use the supplied power cord for any
purpose other than that described below.
! The receiver should be disconnected by
removing the mains plug from the wall
socket when not in regular use, e.g., when on
vacation.
! Make sure the blue u STANDBY/ON light has
gone out before unplugging.
! If you have connected speakers with a 6 W
impedance, change the impedance setting
before turning on the power.

En 25

04 Basic Setup

Basic Setup ! Before using the Full Auto MCACC Setup, the
headphones should be disconnected.
Install the microphone on a stable floor.
Placing the microphone on any of the following
surfaces may make accurate measurement
impossible:
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the CAUTION
Switching the speaker ! Sofas or other soft surfaces.
current menu. ! The test tones used in the Full Auto MCACC
! High places such as tabletops and sofa tops.
impedance 3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home
Setup are output at high volume.
The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the
We recommend using speakers of 8 W with this Menu. THX® microphone is connected.
system, but it is possible to switch the imped- ! THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may
4 Select ‘OSD Language’ from the be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights
ance setting if you plan to use speakers with a 6 1a.Full Auto MCACC

W impedance rating.
System Setup menu. reserved. Speaker System
A/V RECEIVER
: Normal(SB/FH)
EQ Type : SYMMETRY

1 Switch the receiver into standby. 5 Select the desired language. 1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the
MCACC
THX Speaker
: M1.MEMORY 1
: NO

2 While holding down ENTER on the 6 Select ‘OK’ to change the language. receiver and your TV.
The setting is completed and the System Setup Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this
START

front panel, press u STANDBY/ON.
menu reappears automatically. receiver.
The display shows RESET c NO d. Exit Return

3 Use TUNE i/j to select SPEAKER c 2 Connect the microphone to the MCACC
8W d, and then use PRESET k/l to select SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.
Automatically conducting Push down on the lower portion of the front
! If you leave the GUI screen for over five
SPEAKER 8W or SPEAKER 6W. optimum sound tuning (Full minutes, the screen saver will appear.
panel door to access the MCACC SETUP MIC
! SPEAKER 8W – Use this setting if your 3 Select the parameters you want to set.
speakers are rated at 8 W or more.
Auto MCACC) jack.
! When data measurement is taken, the
! SPEAKER 6W – Use this setting if your The Full Auto MCACC Setup measures the
reverb characteristics data (both before- and
speakers are rated at 6 W. acoustic characteristics of your listening area, iPod iPhone iPad AUTO SURR/ALC/
MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL ON/OFF DIRECT CONTROL STREAM DIRECT after-calibration) that this receiver had been
taking into account ambient noise, speaker
storing will be overwritten.
connection and speaker size, and tests for both
! When measurement is taken of the reverb
Changing the OSD display channel delay and channel level. After you have
characteristics data other than SYMMETRY,
language (OSD Language) set up the microphone provided with your sys- PHONES MCACC
SETUP MIC 5V
USB
2.1 A
the data are not measured after the
tem, the receiver uses the information from a
The language used on the Graphical User correction. If you will need to measure after
series of test tones to optimize the speaker set- iPod iPhone iPad

Interface screen can be changed. correcting data, take the measurement
tings and equalization for your particular room.
! The explanations in these operating using the EQ Professional menu in the
VSX-53 only: By performing the Full Auto Microphone
instructions are for when English is selected Manual MCACC setup (page 64).
MCACC Setup procedure, the frequency-phase
for the GUI screen. If the speakers are connected using any setup
characteristics of the connected speakers are
other than Normal(SB/FH), be sure to set
1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the also calibrated.
Speaker System before the Full Auto MCACC
receiver and your TV. Once the Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure is
Setup. See Speaker system setting on page 69 .
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to completed, the Full Band Phase Control func- Tripod
! Speaker System – Shows the current
this receiver (for example, if you connected this tion is automatically turned on (page 39).
settings. When this is selected and ENTER is
receiver to the VIDEO jacks on your TV, make
Make sure there are no obstacles between the pressed, the speaker system selection screen
sure that the VIDEO input is now selected).
Important speakers and the microphone. appears. Select the proper speaker system,
2 Press on the remote control, ! Make sure the microphone and speakers are If you have a tripod, use it to place the micro- then press RETURN to return.
then press HOME MENU. not moved during the Full Auto MCACC Setup. phone so that it’s about ear level at your If you are planning on bi-amping your front
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen ! Using the Full Auto MCACC Setup will normal listening position. If you do not have speakers, or setting up a separate speaker
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC a tripod, use some other object to install the system in another room, read through
ENTER to navigate through the screens and preset you select. microphone. Speaker system setting on page 69 and make
26 En

Basic Setup 04

sure to connect your speakers as necessary 7 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press
before continuing to step 4.
1a.Full Auto MCACC Problems when using the Auto
A/V RECEIVER
ENTER.
! EQ Type – This determines how the
Now Analyzing... 2/10
A progress report is displayed on-screen while MCACC Setup
frequency balance is adjusted. Environment Check
Ambient Noise : OK the receiver outputs more test tones to deter- If the room environment is not optimal for the
! MCACC – The six MCACC presets are used Microphone
Speaker YES/NO :
:
mine the optimum receiver settings. Auto MCACC Setup (too much background
for storing surround sound settings for 1a.Full Auto MCACC Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking
A/V RECEIVER
different listening positions. Simply choose L
FHL
:
:
YES
YES happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes. the speakers from the microphone) the final
Exit C : YES Cancel
an unused preset for now (you can rename it FHR : YES settings may be incorrect. Check for household
R : YES 8 The Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure
later in Data Management on page 67 ). SR : YES
appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.),
SBR
SBL
:
:
YES
YES is completed and the Home Menu menu
! THX Speaker – Select YES when using THX SL : YES that may be affecting the environment and
10
SW : YES
reappears automatically.
speakers (all speakers other than the front OK RETRY switch them off if necessary. If there are any
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from
speakers are set to SMALL). In other cases, instructions showing in the front panel display,
Exit Cancel
this receiver upon completion of the Full Auto
leave at NO. please follow them.
MCACC Setup.
4 Press then select START. The configuration shown on-screen should ! Some older TVs may interfere with the
The settings made in the Full Auto MCACC
reflect the actual speakers you have. operation of the microphone. If this seems to
5 Follow the instructions on-screen. Setup should give you excellent surround
! If you see an ERR message (or the speaker be happening, switch off the TV when doing
Make sure the microphone is connected, and sound from your system, but it is also possible
configuration displayed isn’t correct), the Auto MCACC Setup.
if you’re using a subwoofer, make sure it is to adjust these settings manually using The
switched on and set to a comfortable volume there may be a problem with the speaker Advanced MCACC menu on page 62 or The
level. connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, System Setup and Other Setup menus on page
turn off the power and check the speaker 69 .
6 Wait for the test tones to finish, then connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a ! Depending on the characteristics of your
confirm the speaker configuration in the problem, you can simply use i/j to select room, sometimes identical speakers with
GUI screen. the speaker and k/l to change the setting cone sizes of around 12 cm (5 inches) will
A progress report is displayed on-screen while and continue. end up with different size settings. You
the receiver outputs test tones to determine ! If the speaker is not pointed to the can correct the setting manually using the
the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as microphone (listening position) or when Manual speaker setup on page 69 .
quiet as possible while it’s doing this. using speakers that affect the phase ! The subwoofer distance setting may be
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), farther than the actual distance from the
while the speaker configuration check screen Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the listening position. This setting should
is being displayed, the Full Auto MCACC Setup speakers are properly connected. be accurate (taking delay and room
will resume automatically. In this case, you If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s characteristics into account) and generally
don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the does not need to be changed.
step 7. speaker connections. ! If Full Auto MCACC Setup measurement
! With error messages (such as Too much — If the connections were wrong, turn off results are incorrect due to the interaction of
ambient noise! or Check microphone.), the power, disconnect the power cord, the speakers and viewing environment, we
select RETRY after checking for ambient then reconnect properly. After this, recommend adjusting the settings manually.
noise (see Problems when using the Auto perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure
MCACC Setup on page 27 ) and verifying the again.
mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be — If the connections were right, select
a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT GO NEXT and continue.
and continue.

En 27

04 Basic Setup

5 Select the input(s) to which you’ve
The Input Setup menu Input function default and Operation Mode Setup
connected your component.
For example, if your DVD player only has an possible settings
You only need to make settings in the This receiver is equipped with a great number
Input Setup menu if you didn’t hook up your optical output, you will need to change the DVD The terminals on the receiver generally cor- of functions and settings. The Operation Mode
digital equipment according to the default input function’s Digital In setting from COAX-1 respond to the name of one of the input func- feature is provided for users who find it difficult
settings (see Input function default and possible (default) to the optical input you’ve connected tions. If you have connected components to to master all these functions and settings.
settings on page 28 ). In this case, you need to it to. The numbering (OPT-1 to OPT-2) corre- this receiver differently from (or in addition to) One of two settings can be selected for the
tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up sponds with the numbers beside the inputs on the defaults below, see The Input Setup menu Operation Mode: Expert and Basic.
to which terminal so the buttons on the remote the back of the receiver. on page 28 to tell the receiver how you’ve
1 Press on the remote control,
control correspond to the components you’ve connected up. The dots (k) indicate possible
6 When you’re finished, proceed to the then press HOME MENU.
connected. assignments.
settings for other inputs. A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
1 Press on the remote control, There are optional settings in addition to the Input Input Terminals appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and
then press HOME MENU. assignment of the input jacks: function ENTER to navigate through the screens and
HDMI Digital Component
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen ! Input Name – You can choose to rename the select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
input function for easier identification. Select BD (BD)
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and current menu.
ENTER to navigate through the screens and Rename to do so, or Default to return to the DVD IN 5 COAX-1 IN 1
2 Select ‘Operation Mode Setup’ from
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the system default. k
TV/SAT OPT-1 k the Home Menu.
current menu. ! Input Skip – When set to ON, that input <a>
is skipped when selecting the input using DVR/BDR IN 6 OPT-2 IN 2
3 Select the Operation Mode setting you
2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the want.
INPUT SELECT. (DVD and other inputs can VIDEO IN 4 OPT-3
Home Menu. k
! Expert (default) – Users can set all the
be still be selected directly with the input
3 Select ‘Input Setup’ from the HDMI 1 IN 1 functions by themselves.
function buttons.)
System Setup menu. ! 12V Trigger1/2 – After connecting a HDMI 2 IN 2 ! Basic – The number of operable functions is
component to one of the 12 volt triggers (see HDMI 3
restricted, and functions whose operations
4.System Setup IN 3
A/V RECEIVER Switching components on and off using the (front panel) are restricted are automatically set to achieve
a.Manual SP Setup
b. Input Setup 12 volt trigger on page 24 ), select MAIN, the Pioneer-recommended sound and
c. OSD Language HOME
d. Network Setup ZONE 2, ZONE 3 (VSX-53 only) or OFF for the MEDIA picture quality. The functions that can be
e. HDMI Setup
f. Other Setup 4b.Input Setup
A/V RECEIVER
corresponding trigger setting to switch it on GALLERY operated are shown below. They can be set
Input : DVD automatically along with the (main or sub) as necessary by referring to the operating
Input Name : Rename iPod/USB
Input Skip : OFF
zone specified. instructions.
Digital In : COAX-1
CD COAX-2
— VSX-53 only:
Exit Return
HDMI Input : DVD
Component In : In-1
Operable
12V Trigger1 : OFF
Devices connected to 12 volt triggers can TUNER
12V Trigger2 : OFF
functions/ Descriptions Page
be associated with HDMI OUT switching. ADAPTER items
Exit Finish For details, see HDMI Setup on page 47 . PORT
HOME MENU
7 When you’re finished, press RETURN. SIRIUS k Full Auto Makes high precision
4 Select the input function that you You will return to the System Setup menu. MCACC sound field settings easily.
26
a With Control with HDMI set to ON, assignments
want to set up. cannot be made (see Control with HDMI function on Input names can be
The default names correspond with the names page 47 ). Input Name changed as desired for 28
next to the terminals on the rear panel (such as easier use.
DVD or BD) which, in turn, correspond with the
Inputs not being used are
names on the remote control. Input Skip 28
skipped (not displayed).

28 En

Basic Setup 04

Operable Operable
functions/ Descriptions Page functions/ Descriptions Page
items items
Software Updates to the latest ver- PHASE CTRL
74 Plays with phase shifting in
Update sion of the software. (Phase Con- 39
the low range corrected.
Network Checks the receiver’s IP trol)
73
Information address. VSX-53 only: The Full Band Phase
Pairing Pairs with a Bluetooth PHASE CTRL Control feature calibrates
Bluetooth device using AS-BT100 or 35 (Full Band the frequency-phase char- 39
Setup AS-BT200. Phase Con- acteristics of the speakers
trol) connected.
Audio Parameters
Switches the input to iPod/
MCACC iPod iPhone
Selects your favorite USB and sets the mode
(MCACC 50 iPad DIRECT 31
MCACC preset memory. allowing operation from
preset) CONTROL
the iPod.
DELAY Adjusts the delay time of
50
(Sound Delay) the overall sound. 4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
S.RTRV Plays compressed sound You will return to the Home Menu.
(Auto Sound with high sound quality. 50
Retriever)
DUAL Dual monaural audio
50
(Dual Mono) setting.
V.SB Creates a virtual surround
(Virtual Sur- back channel sound for 50
round Back) playback.
V.HEIGHT Creates a virtual height
(Virtual channel sound for play- 50
Height) back.
V.DEPTH
Plays with a sound field
(Virtual 50
suited for 3D images.
Depth)
Other functions
INPUT
SELECT
Switches the input. 30
(INPUT
SELECTOR)
MASTER
Use to set the listening
VOLUME +/–, 30
volume.
MUTE
LISTENING Only Pioneer-recommended
37
MODE modes can be selected.
Plays using the PQLS
PQLS 48
function.

En 29

05 Basic playback

Basic playback Playing an iPod
1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the
receiver and your TV.
This receiver has the iPod iPhone iPad USB See Connecting an iPod on page 23 .
terminal that will allow you to control playback ! It is also possible to operate the iPod on the
! See also Listening to your system on page 37
Playing a source for information on different ways of listening
of audio content from your iPod using the con- iPod itself, without using the TV screen. For
trols of this receiver. details, see Switching the iPod controls on
Here are the basic instructions for playing a to sources.
! This receiver is compatible with the audio page 31 .
source (such as a DVD disc) with your home It is possible to check on the front panel dis-
theater system. and video of the iPod nano (audio only for the 2 Press iPod USB on the remote control
play whether or not multi-channel playback is
iPod nano 1G/2G), iPod fifth generation (audio to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.
1 Switch on your system components being performed properly. For details, see Auto
only), iPod classic, iPod touch, iPhone and Loading appears in the GUI screen while the
and receiver. Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different
iPad. However, some of the functions may be receiver verifies the connection and retrieves
Start by switching on the playback compo- input signal formats on page 90 .
restricted for some models. The receiver is not data from the iPod.
nent (for example a DVD player), your TV and When using a surround back speaker,
compatible with the iPod shuffle. When the display shows the iPod Top menu
subwoofer (if you have one), then the receiver 2DIGITAL is displayed when playing Dolby
! This receiver has been developed and tested you’re ready to play music from the iPod.
(press u RECEIVER). Digital 5.1 channel signals, and DTS is dis-
for the software version of iPod/iPhone/iPad ! The controls of your iPod will be inoperable
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this played when playing DTS 5.1-channel signals.
indicated on the website of Pioneer (http:// when connected to this receiver.
receiver. If the display does not correspond to the input
pioneer.jp/homeav/support/ios/na/).
signal and listening mode, check the connec-
2 Select the input function you want to ! Installing software versions other than
tions and settings. Playing back audio files stored on
play. indicated on the website of Pioneer to your
You can use the input function buttons on the 5 Use the MASTER VOLUME +/– to adjust iPod/iPhone/iPad may result in incompatibility an iPod
remote control, INPUT SELECT, or the front the volume level. with this receiver. To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take
panel INPUT SELECTOR dial. Turn down the volume of your TV so that all ! iPod, iPhone and iPad are licensed for advantage of the GUI screen of your TV con-
! If you need to manually switch the input sound is coming from the speakers connected reproduction of non-copyrighted materials nected to this receiver. You can also control all
signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 39). to this receiver. or materials the user is legally permitted to operations for music in the front panel display
reproduce. of this receiver.
3 Press to the receiver operation
Playing a source with HDMI ! Features such as the equalizer cannot ! Note that characters that cannot be displayed
mode.
connection be controlled using this receiver, and we on this receiver are displayed as #.
4 Press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT recommend switching the equalizer off before ! This feature is not available for photos on your
(AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to % Use INPUT SELECT to select the input connecting. iPod. To display photos, switch iPod operation
select ‘AUTO SURROUND’ and start function connected to the receiver’s HDMI ! Pioneer cannot under any circumstances to the iPod (see Switching the iPod controls on
playback of the source. input terminals. accept responsibility for any direct or indirect page 31 ).
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround You can also perform the same operation by loss arising from any inconvenience or loss
sound source, you should hear surround sound. using the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front of recorded material resulting from the iPod Finding what you want to play
If you are playing a stereo source, you will only panel or by pressing HDMI on the remote con- failure. When your iPod is connected to this receiver,
hear sound from the front left/right speakers in trol repeatedly. ! When listening to a track on the iPod in the you can browse songs stored on your iPod by
the default listening mode. ! Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio main zone, it is possible to control the sub playlist, artist name, album name, song name,
! You may need to check the digital audio options on page 50 to THROUGH if you want zone, but not to listen to a different track in genre or composer, similar to using your iPod
output settings on your DVD player or digital to hear HDMI audio output from your TV (no the sub zone from the one playing in the main directly.
satellite receiver. It should be set to output sound will be heard from this receiver). zone.
Dolby Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM ! If the video signal does not appear on your
1 Use i/j to select ‘Music’ from the
(2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on iPod Top menu.
audio option, set this to convert the MPEG your component or display. Note that some
audio to PCM. components (such as video game units) have
resolutions that may not be converted. In this
30 En case, use an analog video connection.

Basic playback 05

2 Use i/j to select a category, then 1 Press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod ! Press iPod USB to switch the remote control
press ENTER to browse that category. controls. Note to the iPod/USB operation mode.
! To return to the previous level any time, press This enables operation and display on your If an Over Current message lights in the dis- AUTO/ALC PGM MEMORY MENU
AUDIO VIDEO DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
RETURN. iPod, and this receiver’s remote control and GUI play, the power requirements of the USB device PARAMETER
LIST
PARAMETER
TUNE TOOLS
HDD DVD

3 Use i/j to browse the selected screen become inactive. are too high for this receiver. Try following the TOP MENU T.EDIT

BAND GUIDE

category (e.g., albums). 2 Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to points below: TV / DTV MPX PQLS

! Use k/l to move to previous/next levels. the receiver controls. ! Switch the receiver off, then on again. PRESET ENTER PRESET

HDMI OUT AUDIO
! Reconnect the USB device with the receiver CATEGORY RETURN 1 2 3
4 Continue browsing until you arrive at switched off. HOME
TUNE
SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP INFO
MENU
what you want to play, then press d to Note ! Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the
iPod CTRL
4 5 6 DISP

start playback. ! Change the receiver’s input to the device) for USB power.
iPod in one action by pressing the If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely
iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL button Playing back photo files stored on
Note your USB device is incompatible.
on the front panel to enable iPod operations a USB memory device
! You can play all of the songs in a particular
on the iPod. ! Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone.
category by selecting the All item at the top of Playing back audio files stored on
each category list. For example, you can play a USB memory device 1 Use i/j to select ‘Photos’ from the
all the songs by a particular artist. USB Top menu.
Playing a USB device The maximum number of levels that you can
select in Step 2 (below) is 8. Also, you can dis- 2 Use i/j to select a folder, then press
Basic playback controls It is possible to play files using the USB inter-
face on the front of this receiver. play and play back up to 30 000 folders and files ENTER to browse that folder.
This receiver’s remote control buttons can be within a USB memory device. ! To return to the previous level any time, press
used for basic playback of files stored on an ! Compatible USB devices include external
! Note that non-Roman characters in the playlist RETURN.
iPod. magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory
drives (particularly key drives) and digital audio are displayed as #. 3 Continue browsing until you arrive at
! Press iPod USB to switch the remote control
players (MP3 players) of format FAT16/32. 1 Use i/j to select ‘Music’ from the what you want to play, then press d to
to the iPod/USB operation mode.
! Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility USB Top menu. start playback.
AUDIO VIDEO
AUTO/ALC PGM MEMORY MENU
DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR (operation and/or bus power) with all USB The selected content is displayed in full screen
PARAMETER PARAMETER
HDD DVD 2 Use i/j to select a folder, then press
LIST TUNE TOOLS
mass storage devices and assumes no and a slideshow starts.
ENTER to browse that folder.
TOP MENU T.EDIT
responsibility for any loss of data that may After a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER
! To return to the previous level any time, press
BAND GUIDE

toggles between play and pause (only when
TV / DTV MPX PQLS
occur when connected to this receiver.
PRESET ENTER PRESET
RETURN.
HDMI OUT AUDIO
1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the Theme on the Slideshow Setup is set to
CATEGORY RETURN 1 2 3
3 Continue browsing until you arrive at Normal (OFF)).
HOME SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP INFO receiver and your TV.
MENU TUNE
4 5 6 DISP what you want to play, then press d to ! If the slideshow is left in the pause mode for
iPod CTRL
See Connecting a USB device on page 23 .
start playback. five minutes, the list screen reappears.
! During Audiobook playback, press i/j to ! Make sure the receiver is in standby when
! Copyrighted audio files cannot be played
switch the playback speed: Faster f Normal disconnecting the USB device.
back on this receiver. Basic playback controls
f Slower. 2 Press iPod USB on the remote control ! DRM-protected audio files cannot be played
to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB. back on this receiver. Button(s) What it does
Switching the iPod controls Loading appears in the GUI screen as this Starts displaying a photo and play-
receiver starts recognizing the USB device con- ENTER, d
You can switch over the iPod controls between Basic playback controls ing a slideshow.
the iPod and the receiver. nected. When the display shows the USB Top This receiver’s remote control buttons can be Stops the player and returns to the
menu you’re ready to play from the USB device. RETURN, k
! You cannot use this function, when an used for basic playback of files stored on USB previous menu.
iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first memory devices. o
Displays the previous photo content.
generation is connected. <a>

En 31

05 Basic playback

Button(s) What it does About playable file formats
p
Displays the next photo content. The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats
<a>
are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats.
e
Pauses/unpauses the slideshow.
<a>
Music files
DISP
Displays the photo information.
<a> Category Extension Stream
a You can only use this button when Theme on the Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
Slideshow Setup is set to Normal (OFF).
Quantization bitrate 16 bit
MP3 MPEG-1, 2, 2.5 Audio
.mp3 Channel 2 ch
Slideshow Setup <a> Layer-3
Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps
Make the various settings for playing slide-
VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
shows of photo files here.
Sampling frequency 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
1 Use i/j to select ‘Slideshow Setup’
WAV .wav LPCM Quantization bitrate 8 bit, 16 bit
from the USB Top menu.
Channel 2 ch, Monaural
2 Select the setting you want.
! Theme – Add various effects to the Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
slideshow. Quantization bitrate 16 bit
WMA8/9
! Interval – Set the interval for switching the WMA .wma Channel 2 ch

photos. This may not be available depending Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps
on the Theme setting. VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
! BGM – Play music files stored on the USB
a “MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”
device while displaying photos.
b Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not sup-
! Music Select – Select the folder containing ported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice.
the music files to be played when BGM is set
to ON. Photo files
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the USB Top menu. Category Extension
.jpg Meeting the following conditions:
.jpeg ! Baseline JPEG format (including files recorded in Exif/DCF
Format
JPEG .jpe format)
.jif ! Y:Cb:Cr - 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0
.jfif Resolution 30 to 8184 pixels vertical, 40 to 8184 pixels horizontal

32 En

Basic playback 05

! While listening to FM radio, press 4 Press ENTER.
Listening to the radio AUTO/ALC/DIRECT for Neural Surround. After pressing ENTER, the preset class and Listening to Satellite Radio
The following steps show you how to tune in to ! The Neural Surround mode can be selected number stop blinking and the receiver stores To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to con-
FM and AM radio broadcasts using the auto- also with STANDARD. the station. nect a SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner (sold sepa-
matic (search) and manual (step) tuning func- rately) to your Sirius-Ready receiver. SIRIUS
tions. If you already know the frequency of the Tuning directly to a station Listening to station presets Satellite Radio is available to residents of the
station you want, see Tuning directly to a sta- US (except Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.
tion below. Once you are tuned to a station you 1 Press TUNER to select the tuner. 1 Press TUNER to select the tuner. Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-
can memorize the frequency for recall later-see 2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or 2 Press CLASS to select the class in which free music from categories ranging from Pop,
Saving station presets on page 33 for more on AM), if necessary. the station is stored. Rock, Country, R&B, Dance, Jazz, Classical
how to do this. 3 Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access). Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to and many more plus coverage of all the top
1 Press TUNER to select the tuner. G. professional and college sports including play
4 Use the number buttons to enter the by play games from select leagues and teams.
2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or frequency of the radio station. 3 Press PRESET k/l to select the
Additional programming includes expert sports
AM), if necessary. For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, station preset you want.
talk, uncensored entertainment, comedy, fam-
6, 0, 0. ! You can also use the number buttons on the
3 Tune to a station. ily programming, local traffic and weather and
If you make a mistake halfway through, press remote control to recall the station preset.
There are three ways to do this: news from your most trusted sources.
! Automatic tuning – To search for stations D.ACCESS twice to cancel the frequency and Once you’ve purchased a SIRIUS tuner you’ll
in the currently selected band, press and start over. Naming station presets need to activate it and subscribe to begin
hold TUNE i/j for about a second. The For easier identification, you can name your enjoying the service. Easy to follow installation
receiver will start searching for the next Saving station presets station presets. and setup instructions are provided with the
station, stopping when it has found one. If you often listen to a particular radio station, 1 Choose the station preset you want to SIRIUS tuner. There are a variety of program-
Repeat to search for other stations. it’s convenient to have the receiver store the name. ming packages available, including the option
! Manual tuning – To change the frequency frequency for easy recall whenever you want See Listening to station presets on page 33 for of adding “The Best of XM” programming to the
one step at a time, press TUNE i/j. to listen to that station. This saves the effort of how to do this. SIRIUS service. The “Best of XM” service is not
! High speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE manually tuning in each time. This receiver can available to SIRIUS Canada subscribers at this
i/j for high speed tuning. Release the 2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT). time. Please check with SIRIUS Canada for any
memorize up to 63 stations, stored in seven The display shows PRESET NAME, then a blink-
button at the frequency you want. banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 stations each. updates using the numbers and web address
ing cursor at the first character position. below.
1 Tune to a station you want to 3 Input the name you want. Family friendly packages are also available to
Improving FM sound memorize. Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the restrict channels featuring content that may be
If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn’t See Listening to the radio on page 33 for more position, and ENTER to confirm your selection. inappropriate for children.
light when tuning to an FM station because the on this. To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. and Canadian
signal is weak, press MPX to switch the receiver
2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT). Note customers can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-
into mono reception mode. This should improve
The display shows PRESET MEMORY, then a 7474) or visit sirius.com (US) or siriuscanada.
the sound quality and allow you to enjoy the ! To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1
blinking memory class. ca (Canada).
broadcast. to 3 and input eight spaces instead of a name.
3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven ! Once you have named a station preset, you SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos
classes, then press PRESET k/l to select can press DISP when listening to a station are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its
Using Neural Surround subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Service not
the station preset you want. to switch the display between name and
This feature uses Neural SurroundTM technolo- You can also use the number buttons to select a frequency. available in Alaska and Hawaii.
gies to achieve optimal surround sound from station preset.
FM radio.

En 33

05 Basic playback

% Press SIRIUS to switch to the SIRIUS Selecting channels and browsing by 4 Press ENTER. ! Antenna Aiming – Check the strength of
input. genre After pressing ENTER, the preset class and satellite and terrestrial reception.
For best reception, you may need to move the number stop blinking and the receiver stores ! Memory Recall – Use i/j to browse your
From the SIRIUS Channel Guide, you can
SiriusConnectTM tuner antenna near a window the SIRIUS channel. saved song information.
browse SIRIUS Radio channels in the order that
(refer to the manual for the SiriusConnectTM ! Password Set – Set the parental lock
they appear, or you can narrow your channel
Home tuner for antenna placement password.
search by genre. Note
recommendations). ! You can also press MEMORY during 3 When you’re finished press TOP MENU
! If after pressing SIRIUS the display shows % Press i/j to enter the SIRIUS
reception display to save the information of up to return to the reception display.
Antenna Error, try disconnecting the antenna Channel Guide, then navigate through
to five songs. See Using the SIRIUS Menu on
and reconnecting. If the display shows the channels one at time with i/j, then
page 34 to recall this information.
Check Sirius Tuner, check the connection press ENTER to listen to the SIRIUS radio
! You can reset the Channel presets, Memory,
of the AC adapter and this receiver to the broadcast.
Channel Skip/Add, Parental Lock and
SiriusConnectTM tuner. ! To browse by genre, first press CATEGORY,
Password settings in Resetting the system on
! You can check the strength of reception in use i/j to select a genre, then press ENTER.
page 55 .
Using the SIRIUS Menu on page 34 . ! To cancel and exit any time, press RETURN.
Listening to channel presets
Note Note
! You can select channels directly by pressing 1 Press CLASS to select the class in which
! In order to activate your radio subscription,
D.ACCESS, then the three-digit channel the channel is stored.
you will need the SIRIUS ID (SID) which
number. Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to
uniquely identifies your tuner. The SID may be
! You can press DISP to change SIRIUS Radio G.
found on a sticker located on the packaging,
or on the bottom of the tuner itself. The label information in the front panel display. 2 Press k/l to select the channel preset
will have a printed 12-digit SID number. When ! The currently selected channel is you want.
you have located the SID, write it down in the automatically chosen (without pressing You can also use the number buttons on the
space provided near the end of this manual. ENTER) after 10 seconds. remote control to recall the channel preset.
Contact SIRIUS on the internet at:
https://activate.siriusradio.com Saving channel presets Using the SIRIUS Menu
! Follow the prompts to activate your This receiver can memorize up to 63 channels, The SIRIUS Menu provides additional SIRIUS
subscription, or you can also call SIRIUS toll- stored in seven banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 Radio features.
free at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474). channels each.
! Select 0 (SIRIUS ID) from the GUI screen to 1 Press TOP MENU.
check the Radio ID of the SIRIUS Connect 1 Select the channel you want to
2 Use i/j to select a menu item, then
tuner (see Selecting channels and browsing by memorize.
press ENTER.
genre on page 34 ). See Selecting channels and browsing by genre
Choose from the following menu items:
on page 34 .
! Channel Skip/Add – Use i/j and ENTER
Listening to SIRIUS Radio 2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT). to select channels you would like to remove/
The display shows a blinking memory class. restore from/to the channel guide.
After connecting, you will be able to use this
3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven ! Parental Lock – Use i/j and ENTER to
receiver to select channels and navigate cat-
classes, then press k/l to select the select channels you would like to place under
egories using the GUI screen.
channel preset you want. parental lock. Channels put under parental
! It’s easiest if you have your TV switched on to
You can also use the number buttons to select a lock are not displayed in the Channel Guide,
take advantage of the GUI screens. You can,
station preset. but may be accessed by directly inputting
however, use just the front panel display to do
their channel number and providing the
everything if you prefer.
parental lock password.
34 En

Basic playback 05

be enjoyed on devices equipped with SCMS-T If pairing is successful, there is no need to 4 Select ‘Pairing Bluetooth Device’, then
Bluetooth ADAPTER for type Bluetooth wireless technology. performing the pairing operation below. press ENTER.
Wireless Enjoyment of Music ! With the AS-BT100, some functions may not ! When using the AS-BT200 only: This unit 5 Select the ‘Passcode’ setting you want.
be available on this receiver. complies with Bluetooth Specifications Select the same passcode as the Bluetooth
Device not Ver. 2.1. When this unit and another device
equipped with wireless technology device you wish to connect.
Bluetooth wireless
Remote control operation equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology ! 0000/1234/8888 – Select the passcode from
technology: The remote control supplied with this unit both comply with Bluetooth Specification Ver. these options. These are the passcodes that
Digital music
allows you to play and stop media, and perform 2.1, pairing of the two may be possible without can be used in most cases.
Bluetooth Bluetooth wireless player the need for inputting a password.
wireless technology + other operations. ! Others – Select to use a passcode other than
technology enabled device: Bluetooth audio ! It must be necessary that the Bluetooth In this case, a passcode may be displayed on those mentioned above.
enabled device: Digital music transmitter wireless technology enabled device supports this receiver and on the device equipped with
cell phone player (sold commercially) Bluetooth wireless technology. If this happens, 6 If you selected ‘Others’ in step 5, enter
AVRCP profiles.
check that the same passcode is displayed the passcode.
! Remote control operations cannot be
on this receiver and the device equipped Use i/j to select a number and k/l to move
guaranteed for all Bluetooth wireless
with Bluetooth wireless technology, then the cursor.
technology enabled devices.
select YES with the k and l keys and press 7 Follow the instructions displayed on
ENTER. After this, also perform the connection the GUI screen to conduct pairing with the
Music data Bluetooth ® Pairing the Bluetooth ADAPTER operation on the Bluetooth device to be Bluetooth wireless technology device.
ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless connected. If the passcode does not match Switch on the Bluetooth wireless technology
This receiver technology device the code displayed on the Bluetooth device to device that you want to make pair, place it near
“Pairing” must be done before you start play- be connected, select NO to cancel pairing, the receiver and set it to the pairing mode.
back of Bluetooth wireless technology content then try starting over.
8 Check to see that the Bluetooth
ADVANCED
MCACC FL OFF HDMI iPod iPhone iPad

using the Bluetooth ADAPTER. Make sure to Press ADPT to set the ADAPTER PORT
INPUT
SELECTOR
MASTER
VOLUME

ADAPTER is detected by the Bluetooth
perform pairing the first time you operate the input, then conduct the pairing operation on
STANDBY /ON

wireless technology device.
system or any time pairing data is cleared. the Bluetooth wireless technology device.
When the Bluetooth wireless technology device
The pairing step is necessary to register the If pairing is successful, there is no need to
is connected:
Bluetooth wireless technology device to enable performing the pairing operation below.
Remote control CONNECTED appears in the receiver display.
Bluetooth communications. For more details, ! Pair one unit at a time.
operation ! The system can display alphanumeric
see also the operating instructions of your ! When connecting this receiver by Bluetooth
characters only. Other characters may not be
Bluetooth wireless technology device. connections with a device equipped with the
displayed correctly.
! Pairing is required when you first use the Bluetooth function to listen to music, do not
When the Bluetooth wireless technology device
Wireless music play Bluetooth wireless technology device and connect any devices other than this receiver
is not connected:
Bluetooth ADAPTER. by Bluetooth connection to the Bluetooth-
When the Bluetooth ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or Go back to the passcode setting in step 5. In
! To enable Bluetooth communication, pairing equipped device. If a Bluetooth connection is
AS-BT200) is connected to this unit, a product this case, perform the connection operation
should be done with both your system and already established with a device other than
equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology from the Bluetooth wireless technology device.
Bluetooth wireless technology device. this receiver, disconnect the other device
(portable cell phone, digital music player, etc.) 9 From the Bluetooth wireless
! If the Bluetooth wireless technology device’s before connecting this receiver.
can be used to listen to music wirelessly. Also, technology device list, select Bluetooth
security code is “0000”, there is no need to 1 Press on the remote control,
by using a commercially available transmit- ADAPTER and enter the Passcode selected
make the security code setting on the receiver. then press HOME MENU.
ter supporting Bluetooth wireless technol-
Press ADPT to set the ADAPTER PORT in step 5.
ogy, you can listen to music on a device not 2 Select ‘System Setup’, then press
input, then conduct the pairing operation on ! The passcode may in some cases be referred
equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology. ENTER.
the Bluetooth wireless technology device. to as PASSKEY or PIN code.
The AS-BT100 and AS-BT200 models supports
3 Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.
SCMS-T contents protection, so music can also

En 35

05 Basic playback

4 While listening to a source, set the
Listening to music contents of a
remote control to the receiver operation
Bluetooth wireless technology mode, then press ADV SURR repeatedly to
device with your system select SOUND RETRIEVER AIR.
1 Press ADPT on the remote control to The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are reg-
switch the receiver to ADAPTER PORT istered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG,
input. Inc. and any use of such marks by PIONEER
! When the Bluetooth ADAPTER is not plugged CORPORATION is under license. Other trade-
into the ADAPTER PORT, NO ADAPTER marks and trade names are those of their
will be displayed if ADAPTER PORT input is respective owners.
selected.
2 From the Bluetooth wireless
technology device, perform the operation
to connect to the Bluetooth ADAPTER.
3 Start playback of music contents stored
on the Bluetooth wireless technology
device.
This receiver’s remote control buttons can
be used for basic playback of files stored on
Bluetooth wireless technology devices.
! Bluetooth wireless technology device should
be compatible with AVRCP profile.
! Depending on the Bluetooth wireless
technology device you use, operation may
differ from what is shown in the remote
control buttons.
HDD DVD


TV / DTV MPX PQLS

HDMI OUT AUDIO
1 2 3

36 En

Listening to your system 06

Listening to your system Standard surround sound
! Neo:6 MUSIC – 7.1 channel sound (surround
back), especially suited to music sources
The following modes provide basic surround ! Neural Surround – Up to 7.1 channel sound
sound for stereo and multichannel sources. (surround back), especially suited to music
2 While listening to a source, sources
Enjoying various types of press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT
mode. ! STEREO – The audio is heard with your
playback using the listening (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) for sound settings and you can still use the
modes auto playback of a source. 2 While listening to a source, press
audio options.
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the dis- STANDARD (STANDARD SURROUND).
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source With multichannel sources, if you have con-
play before showing the decoding or playback If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listen-
in surround sound. However, the options avail- nected surround back, front height or front wide
format. Check the digital format indicators in ing mode.
able will depend on your speaker setup and the speakers, you can select (according to format):
the front panel display to see how the source is ! If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby
type of source you’re listening to. ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above
being processed. Surround encoded, the proper decoding
To play with surround sound, check “Standard ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above
! If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby format will automatically be selected and
surround sound”, “Using the Home THX modes” ! Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back
Surround encoded, the proper decoding shows in the display.
or “Using the Advanced surround effects” below channel sound for 5.1 channel sources and
format will automatically be selected and ! If the surround back speakers are not
and select the desired mode. provides pure decoding for 6.1 channel
shows in the display. connected, 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2
To play with the optimum mode for the input sources (like Dolby Digital Surround EX)
! When listening to the FM radio, the Neural Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).
signal, see “Auto playback” or “Using Stream ! DTS-ES Matrix or DTS-ES Discrete – Allows
Surround feature is selected automatically With two channel sources, you can select from:
Direct”. (The sound is played in stereo when you to hear 6.1 channel playback with DTS-
(see Using Neural Surround on page 33 for ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel
2-channel signals are input, in surround when ES encoded sources
more on this). sound (surround back), especially suited to
multi-channel signals are input.) ! DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel
! When listening to the ADAPTER PORT movie sources
playback with DTS encoded sources
input, the SOUND RETRIEVER AIR feature is ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel
! Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel
Important selected automatically. sound (surround back), especially suited to
playback
! The listening modes and many features ALC – In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this music sources
! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – See above
described in this section may not be available receiver equalizes playback sound levels. ! 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel
! WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – See above
depending on the current source, settings and Also, the low and high frequency sounds, dia- sound (surround back), especially suited to
! WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – See above
status of the receiver. logs, surround effects, etc., that are difficult to video games
! STEREO – See above
hear when the volume is low are adjusted to be ! 2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround
! Straight Decode – Plays back without the
Auto playback optimal for the volume level. This mode is par- sound (sound from the surround speakers is
effects above.
ticularly optimum when listening at night. mono)
There are many ways to listen back to sources
OPTIMUM SURR – In the Optimum Surround ! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – Up to 7.1 channel
using this receiver, but the simplest, most Note
mode, this receiver automatically optimizes sound (front height)
direct listening option is the Auto Surround ! When listening sources in
sound balance in each scene based on actually ! WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – Up to 7.1
feature. The receiver automatically detects what 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode, you can also
set volume. The sound balancer controls three channel sound (front wide), especially suited
kind of source you’re playing and selects multi- adjust the H.GAIN effect (see Setting the Audio
major theater sound elements dialogue, bass to movie sources
channel or stereo playback as necessary. options on page 50 ).
and surround with original algorithm. ! WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – Up to 7.1
1 Press to the receiver operation channel sound (front wide), especially suited ! When listening to 2-channel sources in
mode. to music sources Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are
Note ! Neo:6 CINEMA – 7.1 channel sound three further parameters you can adjust:
! When ALC is selected, the effect level can (surround back), especially suited to movie C.WIDTH,DIMENSION and PANORAMA. See
be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in sources Setting the Audio options on page 50 to adjust
Setting the Audio options on page 50 . them.

En 37

06 Listening to your system

! When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 With multichannel sources, press THX ! SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots ! PHONES SURR – When listening through
Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also (HOME THX) repeatedly to select from: of special effects headphones, you can still get the effect of
adjust the center image effect (see Setting the ! THX CINEMA ! MONO FILM – Creates surround sound from overall surround.
Audio options on page 50 ). ! THX MUSIC mono soundtracks
! Neural Surround can be selected for ! THX GAMES ! ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources Note
2-channel signals for which the input signal ! THX Surround EX – Allows you to hear 6.1 ! EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo ! When an Advanced Surround listening mode
is PCM (48 kHz or less), Dolby Digital, DTS or or 7.1 channel playback with 5.1 channel field is selected, the effect level can be adjusted
analog 2-channel sources. sources MUSIC ! TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the
! The stereo mode can also be selected by ! Neo:6 CINEMA+THX CINEMA for both mono and stereo TV sources Audio options on page 50 .
pressing the STEREO button. ! Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC ! ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video However, with F.S.SURR FOCUS,
! When listening through headphones, you can ! Neo:6 GAME+THX GAMES games F.S.SURR WIDE and SOUND RETRIEVER AIR,
select STEREO mode only. ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA ! SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs the effect level cannot be adjusted.
! 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME+THX MUSIC ! CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type ! The Front Stage Surround Advance
Using the Home THX modes ! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX CINEMA sound (F.S.SURR FOCUS and F.S.SURR WIDE)
! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX MUSIC ! ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for
THX and Home THX are technical standards function allows you to create natural surround
! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX GAMES rock and/or pop music
created by THX Ltd. for cinema and home sound effects using just the front speakers
! UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music and the subwoofer.
theater sound. Home THX is designed to make
Note sources
home theater audio sound more like what you
! When listening sources in ! EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to
hear in a cinema.
a stereo source, using all of your speakers Using Stream Direct
Different THX options will be available depend- 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode, you can also
! F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich Use the Stream Direct modes when you want
ing on the source and the setting for surround adjust the H.GAIN effect (see Setting the Audio
surround sound effect directed to the center to hear the truest possible reproduction of a
back channel processing (see THX Audio Setting options on page 50 ).
of where the front left and right speakers source. All unnecessary signal processing is
on page 71 for more on this). bypassed, and you’re left with the pure analog
sound projection area converges.
1 Press to the receiver operation Using the Advanced surround ! F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround or digital sound source.
mode. effects sound effect to a wider area than FOCUS Processing differs depending on the input sig-
2 Press THX (HOME THX) to select a The Advanced surround effects can be used for mode. nal and whether or not surround back speakers
listening mode. a variety of additional surround sound effects. FOCUS position WIDE position
are connected. For details, see Auto Surround,
With two channel sources, press THX repeat- Most Advanced Surround modes are designed (Recommended) ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal
edly to select a matrix-decoding process for the to be used with film soundtracks, but some Front left Front right Front left Front right formats on page 90 .
speaker speaker speaker speaker
THX CINEMA mode (see THX Audio Setting on modes are also suited for music sources. Try 1 Press to the receiver operation
page 71 for an explanation of each process): different settings with various soundtracks to mode.
! THX CINEMA see which you like.
2 While listening to a source,
! THX MUSIC 1 Press to the receiver operation press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT
! THX GAMES mode. (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to
! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA
2 Press ADV SURR select the mode you want.
! 2 PRO LOGIC+THX CINEMA ! SOUND RETRIEVER AIR – Suitable for
(ADVANCED SURROUND) repeatedly to Check the digital format indicators in the front
! Neo:6 CINEMA+THX CINEMA listening to the sound from a Bluetooth
select a listening mode. panel display to see how the source is being
! 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC wireless technology device. The
! ACTION – Designed for action movies with processed.
! Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC SOUND RETRIEVER AIR listening mode can
dynamic soundtracks ! AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on
! 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME+THX GAMES only selected when the ADAPTER PORT
! DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of page 37 .
! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX CINEMA input or listening through headphones.
dialog ! ALC – Listening in Auto level control mode
! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX MUSIC
(page 37).
! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX GAMES
38 En

Listening to your system 06

! DIRECT – Plays back sound from the ! Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your
source with the least modification next Choosing the input signal Better sound using Phase subwoofer to off. If this cannot be done on
to PURE DIRECT. With DIRECT, the only On this receiver, it is possible to switch Control your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a
modifications added to PURE DIRECT the input signals for the different inputs as higher value.
This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses
playback are calibration of the sound field by described below. ! If the speaker distance is not properly set, you
phase correction measures to make sure your
the MCACC system and the Phase Control ! This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL
sound source arrives at the listening position in
effect. PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz) and DTS (including effect.
phase, preventing unwanted distortion and/or
! PURE DIRECT – Plays back unmodified DTS 96/24) digital signal formats. The ! The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to
coloring of the sound.
sound from source with only minimal digital compatible signals via the HDMI terminals ON in the following cases:
Phase Control technology provides coherent
treatment. No sound is output from the are: Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM (32 kHz to 192 — When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched
sound reproduction through the use of phase
Speaker B in this mode. kHz), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS- on.
matching for an optimal sound image. The
! OPTIMUM SURR – Listening in Optimum EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio and SACD. — When the HDMI audio output parameter is
default setting is on and we recommend leav-
Surround mode (page 37). ! You may get digital noise when an LD, CD, set to THROUGH in Setting the Setting the
ing Phase Control switched on for all sound
DVD or BD player compatible with DTS is Audio options on page 50 .
sources.
Note playing an analog signal. To prevent noise,
! When listening through headphones, you can make the proper digital connections (page 16)
mode. Better sound using Phase
select ALC, OPTIMUM SURR or PURE DIRECT and set the signal input to DIGITAL.
mode only. ! Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. 2 Press PHASE CTRL (PHASE CONTROL) to Control and Full Band Phase
For more details, refer to the instruction switch on phase correction. Control
manual supplied with your DVD player. The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front
VSX-53 only
Selecting MCACC presets panel lights.
This receiver is equipped with the two types
! Default setting: MEMORY 1 mode.
of functions that correct phase distortion and
If you have calibrated your system for different 2 Press SIGNAL SEL to select the input Note
group delay: Phase Control and Full Band
listening positions, you can switch between set- ! Phase matching is a very important factor
signal corresponding to the source Phase Control. Activating Full Band Phase
tings to suit the kind of source you’re listening in achieving proper sound reproduction.
component. Control is strongly recommended because it
to and where you’re sitting (for example, watch- If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest
Each press cycles through the options as also involves the effects of Phase Control.
ing movies from a sofa, or playing a video game and trough together, resulting in increased
follows: The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates
close to the TV). amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound
! AUTO – The receiver selects the first the frequency-phase characteristics of the
signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough,
1 Press to the receiver operation available signal in the following order: HDMI; speakers connected.
then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an
mode. DIGITAL; ANALOG. Standard speakers designed exclusively for
unreliable sound image will be produced.
! ANALOG – Selects an analog signal. audio use generally reproduce sound with the
2 While listening to a source, press ! The PHASE CONTROL feature is available
! DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial divided frequency bands output from a speaker
MCACC. even when the headphones are plugged in.
digital signal. system consisting of multiple speakers (in
Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC ! If your subwoofer has a phase control switch,
! HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal. case of typical 3-way speakers, for instance,
presets. See Data Management on page 67 to set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0º). However,
— When the HDMI audio output parameter the tweeter, the squawker (midrange), and the
check and manage your current settings. the effect you can actually feel when
is set to THROUGH, the sound will be woofer output sound in the high-, middle-, and
! These settings have no effect when PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver
heard through your TV, not from this low-frequency ranges, respectively). Though
headphones are connected. depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set
receiver. these speakers are designed to flatten the fre-
! You can also press k/l to select the your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is
When set to DIGITAL, HDMI or AUTO (only quency-amplitude characteristics across wide
MCACC preset. also recommended you try changing the
selected DIGITAL or HDMI), the indicators light ranges, there are cases where the group delay
orientation or the place of your subwoofer.
according to the signal being decoded (see characteristics are not effectively flattened. This
Display on page 9 ).

En 39

06 Listening to your system

phase distortion of the speakers subsequently ! The original characteristics of group delay
causes group delay (the delay of low-frequency of the speakers calibrated and the targeted
sound against high-frequency sound) during characteristics after correction can be
audio signal playback. displayed graphically in the GUI screen (see
This receiver analyzes the frequency-phase Checking MCACC Data on page 66 ). Also,
characteristics of the speakers by measuring by transferring the measurement data to the
test signals output from the speakers with the computer using the CD-ROM (AVNavigator),
supplied microphone, therefore flattening the the original characteristics of group delay of
analyzed frequency-phase characteristics dur- the speakers calibrated and the corrected
ing audio signal playback - the same correction characteristics of group delay can be
is made for a pair of left and right speakers. displayed in 3-dimension on your PC. For
This correction minimizes group delay between details, refer to the operating instructions
the ranges of a speaker and improves the fre- for the Advanced MCACC PC Display
quency-phase characteristics across all ranges. Application Software included on the CD-ROM
Furthermore, the enhanced frequency-phase (AVNavigator).
characteristics between channels ensure better ! Depending on the input signal and listening
surround sound integration for multichannel mode, it may not be possible to set the
setting. Full Band Phase Ctrl mode to ON.
! The Full Band Phase Ctrl mode cannot be set
1 Press to the receiver operation to ON in the following cases:
mode. — When headphones are plugged in.
— When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched
2 Press PHASE CTRL (PHASE CONTROL) to on.
select FULLBAND PHASE. — When the HDMI audio output parameter is
Both the Phase Control and Full Band Phase set to THROUGH in Setting the Setting the
Control functions are switched on. The Audio options on page 50 .
FULL BAND and indicator, on the front
panel lights.

Note
! To calibrate and analyze the frequency-
phase characteristics of the speakers,
either follow the Full Auto MCACC
procedure under Advanced MCACC
(see Automatically conducting optimum
sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page
26 ), or set Auto MCACC menu under
Auto MCACC under ADVANCED MCACC to
Full Band Phase Ctrl. Select ALL when you
perform the Auto MCACC with Auto MCACC
menu. Upon calibration of the frequency-
phase characteristics of the speakers, the
Full Band Phase Ctrl feature is automatically
switched on.
40 En

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs 07

Playback with HOME MEDIA ! PCs running Microsoft Windows 7 with
Windows Media Player 12 installed
! Display of the currently playing track
information on the receiver’s display,
! DLNA-compatible digital media servers (on including artist, song and album name.
GALLERY inputs PCs or other components)
Files stored in a PC or DMS (Digital Media
*1: For more information, see the Apple web-
site (http://www.apple.com).
Server) as described above can be played *2: The receiver’s power automatically turns on
! Besides a PC, you can also play back audio via command from an external Digital Media when Network Standby at Network Setup is
Enjoying the Home Media files stored on your other components with the Controller (DMC). Devices controlled by this set to ON.
Gallery built-in media server function based on DLNA DMC to play files are called DMRs (Digital
1.0 or DLNA 1.5 framework and protocols Media Renderers). This receiver supports this Note
(i.e. network-capable hard disks and audio DMR function. When in the DMR mode, such ! A network environment is required to use
systems). operations as playing and stopping files can AirPlay.
% Listening to Internet radio stations be performed from the external controller. ! The receiver’s name that shows up in the
You can select and listen to your favorite Volume adjustment and the muting control AirPlay UI on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad and
This receiver’s Home Media Gallery function are also possible. The DMR mode is canceled
Internet radio station from the list of Internet iTunes can be changed by Friendly Name
allows you to listen to audio files or listen to if the remote control unit is operated while in
radio stations created, edited, and managed by from Network Setup.
Internet radio stations on a computer or other the DMR mode (aside from certain buttons,
the vTuner database service exclusively for use ! AirPlay provided on this receiver has been
component connected to the receiver’s LAN including the MASTER VOLUME +/–, MUTE
with the Pioneer products. developed and tested based on the software
terminal. This chapter describes the setup and and DISP).
dSee Playback with Home Media Gallery on versions for the iPod, iPhone, iPad and the
playback procedures required to enjoy these ! Depending on the external controller being
page 42 and Listening to Internet radio stations software versions for iTunes that are indicated
features. It is advisory that you also refer to the used, playback may be interrupted when the
on page 42 . on the Pioneer website. AirPlay may not be
operation manual supplied with your network volume is adjusted from the controller. In this
component. % Listening to Rhapsody, Sirius or compatible with iPod, iPhone, iPad or iTunes
case, adjust the volume from the receiver or software versions other than those indicated
! To listen to Internet radio stations, you must Pandora
remote control. on the Pioneer website.
sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service dSee Listening to Rhapsody on page 43 .
Provider) beforehand. dSee Listening to Sirius Internet Radio on page
! Photo or video files cannot be played back. 43 . Using AirPlay on iPod touch, About the DHCP server function
! With Windows Media Player 11 or Windows dSee Listening to Pandora Internet Radio on iPhone, iPad, and iTunes
To play back audio files stored on components
Media Player 12, you can even play back page 43 . This receiver supports AirPlay audio streaming on the network or listen to Internet radio sta-
copyrighted audio files on this receiver. from iPod touch (2nd, 3rd and 4th generations), tions, you must turn on the DHCP server func-
iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPad with iOS 4.2 or later, tion of your router. In case your router does
Introduction and iTunes 10.1 (Mac and PC) or later. not have the built-in DHCP server function, it
Features of Home Media To use AirPlay, select your receiver on your iPod is necessary to set up the network manually.
Gallery About playable DLNA network touch, iPhone, iPad or in iTunes. *1 Otherwise, you cannot play back audio files
The receiver’s input will switch automatically to stored on components on the network or listen
This receiver is equipped with the LAN terminal devices
Home Media Gallery when AirPlay is in use. *2 to Internet radio stations. See Network Setup
and you can enjoy the following features by con- The Home Media Gallery allows you to play The following operations can be performed menu on page 71 for more on this.
necting your components to these terminals. music on media servers connected on an identi- when in AirPlay mode:
% Playback the music files stored in PCs cal Local Area Network (LAN) as the receiver. ! Adjustment of the receiver’s volume from iPod
You can playback a lot of musics stored in your This unit allows for the playing of files stored on touch, iPhone, iPad or iTunes.
Authorizing this receiver
PCs using this unit. the following: ! Pause/resume, next/previous track, and In order to be able to play with Home Media
dSee Playback with Home Media Gallery on ! PCs running Microsoft Windows Vista or XP shuffle/repeat from the remote control of the Gallery, this receiver must be authorized. This
page 42 and Playing back audio files stored on with Windows Media Player 11 installed receiver. happens automatically when the receiver
components on the network on page 42 . makes a connection over the network to the PC.

En 41

07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

If not, please authorize this receiver manually 2 Use i/j to select the category you ! Sirius – See Listening to Sirius Internet Radio over the World Wide Web. On this receiver you
on the PC. The authorization (or permission) want to play back, and then press ENTER. on page 43 . can select Internet radio stations by genre as
method for access varies depending on the type Select a category from the following list: ! Pandora – See Listening to Pandora Internet well as by region.
of server currently being connected. For more ! Internet Radio – Internet radio Radio on page 43 . Depending on the Internet line conditions,
information on authorizing this receiver, refer to ! Rhapsody – Rhapsody music broadcast ! Server – See Playing back audio files stored on the sound may not be smooth when playing
the instruction manual of your server. service components on the network on page 42 . Internet radio.
! Sirius – Internet radio that supports Sirius
! Pandora – Internet radio that supports Playing back audio files stored on About list of Internet radio
Playback with Home Media Pandora components on the network The list of Internet radio stations on this receiver
Gallery ! Server Name – Server components on the
You can perform the following operations with
is created, edited, and managed by the vTuner
network database service exclusively for use with this
! Favorites – Favorite songs currently being the remote control of this receiver. Note that
receiver. For details about vTuner, see vTuner
Important registered some buttons are not available for operation
on page 92 .
! When you play back audio files, ! Recently played – Internet Radio listening depending on the category currently being
‘Connecting...’ is displayed before playback history (most recent 20 incidents) played back.
Saving and retrieving Internet radio
starts. The display may continue for several Depending on the selected category, the names ! Press HMG to switch the remote control to the
HOME MEDIA GALLERY operation mode.
stations
seconds depending on the type of file. of folders, files, and Internet radio stations are
! In case a domain is configured in a Windows You can easily save and retrieve saved Internet
displayed. AUTO/ALC PGM MEMORY MENU

radio stations. See Advanced operations for
AUDIO VIDEO DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR

network environment, you cannot access a PC PARAMETER PARAMETER
HDD DVD
3 Use i/j to select the folder, music LIST TUNE TOOLS
Internet radio on page 43 for more on this.
on the network while you are logged onto the THX PHASE CTRL STATUS

files or Internet radio station to play back,
TOP MENU T.EDIT

domain. Instead of logging onto the domain,
BAND GUIDE
TV / DTV MPX PQLS
! To listen to Internet radio stations, you must
and then press ENTER. PRESET ENTER PRESET have high-speed broadband Internet access.
log onto the local machine.
Press i/j to scroll up and down the list and HDMI OUT AUDIO
With a 56 K or ISDN modem, you may not
! There are cases where the time elapsed may CATEGORY RETURN 1 2 3
select the desired item. When you press ENTER, enjoy the full benefits of Internet radio.
not be correctly displayed. HOME
MENU TUNE

playback starts with the playback screen being iPod CTRL
4 5 6 DISP
! The port number varies depending on the
1 Press HMG to select Home Media displayed for the selected item. To return to the Internet radio station. Check the firewall
Gallery as the input function. list screen, press RETURN. settings.
It may take several seconds for this receiver When the list screen is displayed from the Listening to Internet radio ! A list of Internet radio stations provided by the
to access the network. The following screen playback screen, the playback screen reappears stations vTuner database service is subject to change
appears when the Home Media Gallery is automatically if no operation is performed for 10 or deletion without notice due to various
Internet radio is an audio broadcasting service
selected as the input function. The number next seconds while the list screen is displayed. reasons.
transmitted via the Internet. There are a large
to indicates the number of connected servers. Only audio files with the mark can be played. ! Broadcasts may be stopped or interrupted
number of Internet radio stations broadcast-
Top Menu
In case of the folders with the mark, use i/j ing a variety of services from every corner of depending on the Internet radio station. In
1 A/V RECEIVER and ENTER to select the desired folder and the world. Some are hosted, managed, and this case, you cannot listen to a radio station
Internet Radio
Rhapsody
Sirius
audio files. broadcast by private individuals while others selected from the list of Internet radio stations.
Pandora
****** 4 Repeat step 3 to play back the desired are by the corresponding traditional terrestrial
Favorites
Recently Played
song. radio stations or radio networks. Whereas ter- Registering broadcast stations not
Setup

For detailed operating instructions, refer to the restrial, or OTA (over-the-air), radio stations are on the vTuner list from the special
1/8
section shown below. geographically restricted on the range of radio Pioneer site
! Internet radio stations – See Listening to waves broadcast from a transmitter through With the receiver, broadcast stations not
Internet radio stations on page 42 . the air, Internet radio stations are accessible
! The server without the mark cannot be included on the list of station distributed by
! Rhapsody – See Listening to Rhapsody on from anywhere in the world, as long as there is vTuner can be registered and played. Check the
accessed.
page 43 . a connection to the Internet, as services are not access code required for registration on the
transmitted through the air but are delivered receiver, use this access code to access the
42 En


special Pioneer Internet radio site and register registered. In this case they are registered on ! As of April 2011, the Pandora service is only 3 Press CLASS to select the class that you
the desired broadcast stations in your favorites. the receiver as favorite broadcast stations and offered in the United States. want to save the station in.
The address of the special Pioneer Internet can be played. ! Some functions may be changed at Pandora’s Select the desired class from A to G.
radio site is: discretion. 4 Use i/j to select the number that
http://www.radio-pioneer.com Listening to Rhapsody you want to save the station as, and then
1 Display the Internet Radio list screen. Rhapsody is a paid digital music broadcast ser- Playing back your favorite songs press ENTER.
To display the Internet Radio list screen, per- vice provided by RealNetworks. Rhapsody offers You can register up to 20 of your favorite songs You can also select the station number by using
form steps 1 to 3 at Playback with Home Media 30-day free trial. Access the website in order or Internet radio stations in the Favorites folder. the number buttons. Select the desired number
Gallery on page 42 . to set up a trial account: http://www.rhapsody. Note that only the audio files stored on compo- from 1 to 9.
2 Use i/j to select ‘Help’, then press com/pioneer/signup nents on the network can be registered.
ENTER. ! You must have a registered account in order Retrieving saved Internet radio
3 Use i/j to select ‘Get access code’, to listen to songs using Rhapsody. For details, Registering and deleting audio files stations
then press ENTER.
see Checking about the Accounts on page 43 . and Internet radio stations in and
You need to save Internet radio stations first
! As of April 2011, the Rhapsody service is only from the Favorites folder
The access code required for registration on the before retrieving them. If there are no Internet
offered in the United States.
special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed. Press PGM while a song is being played back or radio stations currently being saved, see Saving
! Some functions may be changed at
Make a memo of this address. stopped. The selected song is then registered in Internet radio stations on page 43 and save at
Rhapsody’s discretion.
The following can be checked on the Help the Favorites folder. least one Internet radio station before proceed-
screen: Up to 20 songs or Internet radio stations can be ing with the following steps.
! Get access code – The access code required Listening to Sirius Internet Radio registered.
1 Select the class that you want to
for registration on the special Pioneer Check the website below to listen to Sirius To delete a registered song, select the Favorites
retrieve an Internet radio station from.
Internet radio site is displayed. Internet Radio: http://www.sirius.com/ folder, select the song you want to delete from
Each time you press CLASS, the class switches
! Show Your WebID/PW – After registering siriusinternetradio the folder, and press CLR. The selected song is
to A to G in turn.
on the special Pioneer Internet radio site, the ! You must have a registered account in order to then deleted from the Favorites folder.
registered ID and password are displayed. listen to songs using Sirius Internet Radio. For 2 Use i/j to select the station number
! Reset Your WebID/PW – Resets all the details, see Checking about the Accounts on that you want to retrieve.
information registered on the special page 43 . Advanced operations for You can also select the station number by using
the number buttons.
Pioneer Internet radio site. When reset, all ! Some functions may be changed at Sirius’s Internet radio
the registered broadcast stations are also discretion. ‘Preset Not Stored’ appears when you select
cleared. If you want to listen to the same an Internet radio station currently not being
stations, re-register after resetting. Saving Internet radio stations saved.
Listening to Pandora Internet
4 Access the special Pioneer Internet This receiver can remember the Internet radio
Radio
radio site from your computer and stations that you often listen to in seven classes
Pandora is personalized internet radio that is (A to G) with up to nine stations in each class Checking about the Accounts
perform the registration process.
designed to help you discover new music you’ll to make the total of 63 stations at its maximum Screen concerning Rhapsody, Sirius or
http://www.radio-pioneer.com
love mixed in with music you already know. capacity. Pandora Internet Radio account registration.
Access the above site and use the access code
For details, check the website: http://www.
in step 3 to perform user registration, following 1 Tune into the Internet radio station 1 Press HMG to select Home Media
pandora.com
the instructions on the screen. that you want to save. Gallery as the input function.
! You must have a registered account in order to
5 Register the desired broadcast Tune into the desired Internet radio station by 2 Select ‘Setup’ then press ENTER.
listen to songs using Pandora Internet Radio.
stations as your favorites, following the following Steps 1 to 3 on page 42.
Select Pandora, then follow the instructions 3 Select ‘Accounts’ and press ENTER to
instructions on the computer’s screen. on the screen to make the account settings. 2 Press T.EDIT to switch to the station- confirm your selection.
Both broadcast stations not on the vTuner Also see Checking about the Accounts on page saving mode.
list and stations on the vTuner list can be 43 .
En 43


4 Select Rhapsody, Sirius or Pandora and Content owners use WMDRM technology to to the operating instructions for the software or LOSS, CORRUPTION, ATTACK, VIRUSES,
press ENTER. protect their intellectual property, including device for more information. INTERFERENCE, HACKING, OR OTHER
The contents below can be checked when copyrights. This device uses WMDRM software DLNATM, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIEDTM SECURITY INTRUSION, AND PIONEER
Rhapsody is selected. to access WMDRM protected content. If the are trademarks, service marks, or certification DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY IN CONNECTION
! Set Account WMDRM software fails to protect the content, marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance. WITH THE FOREGOING. PIONEER IS NOT
! Account Info content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke LIABLE OR RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS
The contents below can be checked when Sirius the software’s ability to use WMDRM to play or Content playable over a network OR DAMAGE ARISING FROM ACCESS
is selected. copy protected content. Revocation does not TO OR USE OF CONTENT. NO ORAL OR
! Even when encoded in a compatible format,
! Set Account affect unprotected content. When you download WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN
some files may not play correctly.
The contents below can be checked when licenses for protected content, you agree that BY PIONEER OR ITS CUSTOMER SERVICES
! Movie or Photo files cannot be played back.
Pandora is selected. Microsoft may include a revocation list with the REPRESENTATIVES WILL CREATE ANY SUCH
! There are cases where you cannot listen to an
! Set Account licenses. Content owners may require you to WARRANTY.
Internet radio station even if the station can be
! Sign out upgrade WMDRM to access their content. If you IN NO EVENT WILL PIONEER, ITS AFFILIATES,
selected from a list of radio stations.
5 Follow the instructions on the screen decline an upgrade, you will not be able to access OR THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
! Some functions may not be supported
content that requires the upgrade. DIRECTORS, OR EMPLOYEES BE LIABLE IN
to input and set. depending on the server type or version used.
This product is protected by certain intellectual CONNECTION WITH YOUR USE OF THIRD
! Supported file formats vary by server. As such,
property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of PARTY CONTENT SERVICES THROUGH
Note files not supported by your server are not
such technology outside of this product is pro- THIS DEVICE FOR PERSONAL INJURY
! When disposing of the product, we displayed on this unit. For more information
hibited without a license from Microsoft. OR SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR
recommend you reset it to delete the data. See check with the manufacturer of your server.
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND,
Resetting the system on page 55 . INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES
DLNA Disclaimer for Third Party Content
FOR ATTORNEY’S FEES, LOST DATA OR LOST
ACCESS TO THIRD PARTY CONTENT PROFITS, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF
About network playback SERVICES, INCLUDING ALL ASSOCIATED LIABILITY AND WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED
The network playback function of this unit uses FEATURES AND FUNCTIONALITIES, IS OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN
the following technologies: PROVIDED “AS IS,” “AS AVAILABLE” AND NO EVENT WILL PIONEER’S TOTAL LIABILITY
AT THE USER’S OWN RISK, WITHOUT TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES ARISING FROM
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. PIONEER THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIRD PARTY
Windows Media Player DLNA CERTIFIEDTM Audio Player DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR CONTENT SERVICES (OTHER THAN AS MAY
See Windows Media Player 11/ The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a IMPLIED, IN CONNECTION WITH ACCESS BE REQUIRED BY LAW IN CASES INVOLVING
Windows Media Player 12 on page 92 for more cross-industry organization of consumer elec- TO AND USE OF CONTENT SERVICES PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED $10.00. THE
on this. tronics, computing industry and mobile device THROUGH THIS DEVICE, INCLUDING FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF
companies. Digital Living provides consumers WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF THE ABOVE REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
Windows Media DRM with easy sharing of digital media through a MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PURPOSE. IF ANY APPLICABLE AUTHORITY
wired or wireless network in the home. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, HOLDS ANY PORTION OF THIS SECTION
Microsoft Windows Media Digital Rights
The DLNA certification logo makes it easy AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. PIONEER TO BE UNENFORCEABLE, THEN LIABILITY
Management (WMDRM) is a platform to pro-
to find products that comply with the DLNA DOES NOT GUARANTEE, REPRESENT, OR WILL BE LIMITED TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
tect and securely deliver content for playback
Interoperability Guidelines. This unit complies WARRANT THAT CONTENT SERVICES WILL PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
on computers, portable devices and network
with DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1.5. BE FREE FROM ERRORS, INTERRUPTION,
devices. Home Media Gallery functions as a
When a PC running DLNA server software or
WMDRM 10 for networked devices. WMDRM
other DLNA compatible device is connected to
protected content can only be played on media
this player, some setting changes of software
servers supporting WMDRM.
or other devices may be required. Please refer

44 En

About playback behavior over a About playable file formats
network
The Home Media Gallery feature of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some
! Playback may stall when the PC is switched file formats are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats. Also, the
off or any media files stored on it are deleted compatibility of file formats varies depending on the type of server. Check with your server to ensure
while playing content. the compatibility of file formats supported by your server.
! If there are problems within the network ! Internet radio playback may be affected by the Internet communications environment, and in this
environment (heavy network traffic, etc.) case playback may not be possible even with the file formats listed here.
content may not be displayed or played
properly (playback may be interrupted or
Music files
stalled). For best performance, a 100BASE-
TX connection between player and PC is Category Extension Stream
recommended.
Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
! If several clients are playing simultaneously,
as the case may be, playback is interrupted or Quantization bitrate 16 bit
MP3 MPEG-1 Audio
stalled. .mp3 Channel 2 ch
<a> Layer-3
! Depending on the security software installed Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps
on a connected PC and the setting of such VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
software, network connection may be blocked.
Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction —
LPCM LPCM Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit
of the player and/or the Home Media Gallery 
features due to communication error/malfunc- Channel 2 ch
tions associated with your network connection Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 192 kHz
and/or your PC, or other connected equip- WAV .wav LPCM Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit
ment. Please contact your PC manufacturer or Channel 2 ch
Internet service provider.
“Windows MediaTM” is a trademark of Microsoft
Corporation.
This product includes technology owned by WMA2/7/8 Channel 2 ch
Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or Bitrate 5 kbps to 320 kbps
distributed without a license from Microsoft VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
Licensing, Inc. WMA .wma
Microsoft®, Windows®7, Windows®Vista,
Windows®XP, Windows®2000,
WMA9 Channel 2 ch
Windows®Millennium Edition, Windows®98, and
WindowsNT® are either registered trademarks Bitrate 5 kbps to 320 kbps
or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
United States and/or other countries. Sampling frequency 32 kHz to 48 kHz
.m4a Quantization bitrate 16 bit
MPEG-4 AAC LC
.aac
AAC MPEG-4 HE AAC Channel 2 ch
.3gp
(aacPlus v1/2) Bitrate 16 kbps to 320 kbps
.3g2
VBR/CBR Supported/Supported

En 45


Category Extension Stream
Quantization bitrate 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
FLAC .flac FLAC Channel 2 ch
Bitrate —
VBR/CBR —
a “MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”
b Only streaming data from servers is concerned, so there is no extension.

46 En

Control with HDMI function 08

Control with HDMI function ! To get the most out of this function, we
recommend that you connect your HDMI
5 Select the ‘Control Mode’ setting you
want.
component not to a TV but rather directly to Choose whether you want to enable HDMI for
the HDMI terminal on this receiver. all linked functions or the PQLS function only.
! For details about concrete operations, ! VSX-53 only:
About the Control with HDMI settings, etc., refer to also the operating
However, Display Power Off will activate the
The Control with HDMI function can be used settings set forth in step 6 below.
function instructions for each component. with a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 ! ALL – Enabled for all linked functions.
Synchronized operations below with a Control terminal, but not with a TV connected to the ! PQLS – Enabled only for the PQLS function.
with HDMI-compatible Pioneer TV or Blu-ray HDMI OUT 2 terminal. When PQLS is selected, link functions
Disc player or with a component of another Making Control with HDMI other than the PQLS function may not work
make that supports the Control with HDMI connections properly. If you wish to use all link functions,
functions are possible when the component is You can use synchronized operation for a con- HDMI Setup select ALL.
connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable. nected TV and up to 7 other components. You must adjust the settings of this receiver 6 Select the ‘Display Power Off’ setting
! The receiver’s volume can be set and the ! Be sure to connect the TV’s audio cable to as well as the connected Control with HDMI- you want.
sound can be muted using the TV’s remote the audio input of this unit. When the TV and compatible components in order to make use If the TV’s power is turned off while using the
control. receiver are connected by HDMI connections, of the Control with HDMI function. For more Control with HDMI function, the receiver’s
! The receiver’s input switches over if the TV supports the HDMI ARC (Audio information see the operating instructions for power is also turned off (all power off function).
automatically when the TV’s input is Return Channel) function, the sound of the each component. This function can be disabled.
changed or a Control with HDMI-compatible TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT
1 Press on the remote control, ! YES – The all power off function is enabled.
component is played. terminal, so there is no need to connect an
then press HOME MENU. The receiver’s power turns off together with
! The receiver’s power is also set to standby, audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at the TV’s power. This function only works
when the TV’s power is set to standby. HDMI Setup to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on 2 Select ‘System Setup’, then press
when the input for a component connected
page 47 ). ENTER.
to the receiver by HDMI connection is
Important For details, see Connecting your TV and playback 3 Select ‘HDMI Setup’, then press ENTER. selected or when watching the TV.
! With Pioneer devices, the Control with HDMI components on page 17 . ! NO – The all power off function is disabled.
4 Select the ‘Control’ setting you want.
functions are referred to as “KURO LINK”. The receiver’s power is not affected when the
Choose whether to set this unit’s Control with
! You cannot use this function with components Important TV’s power is turned off.
HDMI function ON or OFF. You will need to set
that do not support Control with HDMI. ! When connecting this system or changing it to ON to use the Control with HDMI function. 7 Select the ‘Standby Through’ setting
! We only guarantee this receiver will work connections, be sure to switch the power off When using a component that does not sup- you want.
with Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible and disconnect the power cord from the wall port the Control with HDMI function, set this When Control is ON, the signals of the input
components and components of other socket. After completing all connections, to OFF. device or TV connected to the receiver can be
makes that support the Control with HDMI connect the power cords to the wall socket. ! ON – Enables the Control with HDMI transferred even when the receiver’s power is in
function. However, we do not guarantee that ! After this receiver is connected to an AC function. When this unit’s power is turned the standby mode (Standby Through mode). The
all synchronized operations will work with outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI off and you have a supported source begin power consumption in this Standby Through
components of other makes that support the initialization process begins. You cannot carry playback while using the Control with HDMI mode can be set to conserve energy.
Control with HDMI function. out any operations during this process. The function, the audio and video outputs from ! Normal – Regular mode. Power-up time from
! Use a High Speed HDMI® cable when you HDMI indicator in the front panel display the HDMI connection are output from the TV. the Standby Through mode is short.
want to use the Control with HDMI function. blinks during this process, and you can turn ! OFF – The Control with HDMI is disabled. ! Eco – Power consumption in the Standby
The Control with HDMI function may not work on this receiver once it has stopped blinking. Synchronized operations cannot be used. Through mode is reduced. Some time is
properly if a different type of HDMI cable is When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF, When this unit’s power is turned off, audio required for powering up from the Standby
used. you can skip this process. For details about the and video of sources connected via HDMI are Through mode.
Control with HDMI feature, see Control with not output.
HDMI function on page 47 .

En 47

08 Control with HDMI function

8 Select the ‘TV Audio’ setting you want. The operations below can also be used on See the Pioneer website for the latest informa-
When a TV supporting the HDMI ARC (Audio About synchronized Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible TVs. tion on the models of non-Pioneer brands and
Return Channel) function is connected to the operations ! When the receiver’s volume is adjusted or the products that support the Control with HDMI
receiver, the sound of the TV can be input via sound is muted, the volume status is displayed function.
The Control with HDMI-compatible component
the HDMI OUT terminal. on the TV’s screen.
connected to the receiver operates in sync as
! Normal – The TV’s sound is input from the ! When the OSD language is switched on
described below.
Audio input terminals other than HDMI ! From the menu screen of the Control with
the TV, the receiver’s language setting also Setting the PQLS function
inputs. switches accordingly. PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a
HDMI-compatible TV, set audio to be played
! via HDMI – The TV’s sound is input via the through this receiver, and the receiver will digital audio signal transfer control technology
HDMI terminal. This can only be selected switch to the synchronized amp mode. About connections with a product using the Control with HDMI function. It offers
when Control is set to ON. ! When in the synchronized amp mode, you of a different brand that supports higher-quality audio playback by controlling
9 Select the ‘12V Trigger’ setting you can adjust the receiver’s volume or mute the the Control with HDMI function audio signals from the receiver to a PQLS com-
want. sound using the TV’s remote control. patible player, etc. This enables removing jitter
The synchronized operations below can be used
VSX-53 only: ! When in the synchronized amp mode, the that has a negative effect on the quality of the
when the receiver’s Control with HDMI func-
The component connected to the 12 V synchronized amp mode is canceled when sound and is generated upon transmission.
tion is connected to a TV of a brand other than
TRIGGER jack can be turned on and off the receiver’s power is turned off. To turn the ! On players compatible with PQLS Bit-stream,
Pioneer that supports the Control with HDMI
when HDMI OUT is switched. HDMI OUT 1, synchronized amp mode back on, set audio to PQLS always works for all sources.
function. (Depending on the TV, however, some
HDMI OUT 2 or OFF can be selected. Select be played through the receiver from the TV’s ! On players compatible with PQLS Multi
of the Control with HDMI functions may not
OFF when you want the component to switch menu screen, etc. This receiver will power up Surround, PQLS works for all sources. Set the
work.)
when the input function is switched. and switch to the synchronized amp mode. player’s audio output to Linear PCM.
! When the TV’s power is set to standby, the
! When the synchronized amp mode is ! On players compatible with PQLS 2 ch Audio,
10 When you’re finished, press receiver’s power is also set to standby. (Only
canceled, the receiver’s power turns off if you PQLS only works when playing CDs.
HOME MENU. when the input for a component connected to
were viewing an HDMI input or a TV program Please refer to the operating instructions sup-
the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or
on the TV. plied with your player for more information.
when watching the TV)
! When in the synchronized amp mode, the This function is activated when Control is set
Before using synchronization ! The sound of TV programs or an external
synchronized amp mode is canceled if an to ON.
Once you have finished all connections and input connected to the TV can also be output
operation that produces sound from the TV is ! If a listening mode other than
settings, you must: from the speakers connected to the receiver.
performed from the TV’s menu screen, etc. AUTO SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT,
(If the TV does not support the HDMI ARC
1 Put all components into standby mode. ! When the TV’s power is set to standby, the PURE DIRECT, OPTIMUM SURR or STEREO is
(Audio Return Channel) function, this requires
2 Turn the power on for all components, receiver’s power is also set to standby. (Only selected while the PQLS effect is enabled, the
connection of an optical digital cable, etc., in
when the input for a component connected to PQLS effect is disabled.
with the power for the TV being turned on addition to the HDMI cable.)
the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or ! When this receiver is connected by HDMI
last. The synchronized operations below can be
when watching the TV.) cable to a Pioneer player that is compatible
3 Choose the HDMI input to which the used when the receiver’s Control with HDMI
! The receiver’s input switches automatically with the PQLS function via HDMI connection
TV is connected to this receiver, and see if function is connected to a player or recorder of
when the Control with HDMI-compatible and HDMI reauthentication is performed
video output from connected components a brand other than Pioneer that supports the
component is played. (the HDMI indicator blinks), the PQLS effect
displays properly on the screen or not. Control with HDMI function.
! The receiver’s input switches automatically is enabled and the listening mode is set to
! When playback starts on the player or
4 Check whether the components when the TV’s input is switched. AUTO SURROUND if a listening mode other
recorder, the receiver’s input switches to
connected to all HDMI inputs are properly ! The synchronized amp mode remains in than AUTO SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT,
the HDMI input to which that component is
displayed. effect even if the receiver’s input is switched PURE DIRECT, OPTIMUM SURR or STEREO is
connected.
to a component other than one connected by selected.
HDMI.

48 En

Control with HDMI function 08

% Press on the remote control,
then press PQLS to select the PQLS
setting.
The setting is displayed on the front panel
display.
! PQLS AUTO – PQLS is enabled. A precision
quartz controller in this receiver eliminates
distortion caused by timing errors (jitter),
giving you the best possible digital-to-analog
conversion when you use the HDMI interface.
This is valid as an HDMI function for PQLS-
compatible players.
! PQLS OFF – PQLS is disabled.

Cautions on the Control with
HDMI function
! Connect the TV directly to this receiver.
Interrupting a direct connection with other
amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI
switch) can cause operational errors.
! Only connect components (Blu-ray Disc
player, etc.) you intend to use as a source to
the HDMI input of this receiver. Interrupting
a direct connection with other amps or an
AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can
cause operational errors.
! When Control is set to ON, HDMI Input
in The Input Setup menu on page 28 is
automatically set to OFF.
! When the receiver’s Control is turned ON,
even if the receiver’s power is in the standby
mode, it is possible to output the audio and
video signals from a player via HDMI to
the TV without producing sound from the
receiver, but only when a Control with HDMI-
compatible component (Blu-ray Disc player,
etc.) and compatible TV are connected. In this
case, the receiver’s power turns on and the
power and HDMI indicators light.

En 49

09 Using other functions

Using other functions Setting
BASS
What it does Option(s)
c –6 to +6 (dB) d
Adjusts the amount of bass.
<a> Default: 0 (dB)
TREBLE c –6 to +6 (dB) d
Setting the Audio options Adjusts the amount of treble.
<a> Default: 0 (dB)
There are a number of additional sound settings you can make using the AUDIO PARAMETER
With the Auto Sound Retriever function, DSP processing OFF
menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold. is used to compensate for the loss of audio data upon
compression, improving the sound’s sense of density
Important S.RTRV and modulation.
(Auto Sound Retriever) When ON is selected, the Sound Retriever effect is
! Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the ON
 optimized based on the bitrate information of the con-
current source, settings and status of the receiver. tents input to the USB memory audio and HOME MEDIA
1 Press to the receiver operation mode, then press AUDIO PARAMETER. GALLERY (digital audio input only) to achieve high sound
quality.
2 Use i/j to select the setting you want to adjust.
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be May improve the quality of sound in a noisy source (for OFF
DNR
example, video tape with lots of background noise) when
selected. Check the table below for notes on this. (Digital Noise Reduc-
switched on. ON
tion)
3 Use k/l to set as necessary. This only has an effect with 2-channel signal inputs.
See the table below for the options available for each setting. Localizes dialog in the center channel to make it stand
4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu. DIALOG E out from other background sounds in a TV or movie c OFF/FLAT/UP1/UP2/UP3/
(Dialog Enhancement) soundtrack. By moving from UP1 through UP2 and UP3 UP4 d
<c> up to UP4, you can make the sound source seem to Default: OFF
Audio parameter menu relocate upwards.
CH1 – Channel 1 is heard
Setting What it does Option(s)
Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital only
Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory when mul- c M1. MEMORY 1 to M6.
MCACC DUAL soundtracks should be played. Dual mono is not widely CH2 – Channel 2 is heard
tiple preset memories are saved. When an MCACC preset MEMORY 6 d
(MCACC preset) (Dual Mono) used, but is sometimes necessary when two languages only
memory has been renamed, the given name is displayed. Default: M1. MEMORY 1
need to be sent to separate channels. CH1 CH2 – Both channels
EQ ON
heard from front speakers
(Acoustic Calibration Switches on/off the effects of EQ Pro.
EQ) OFF This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before OFF OFF
recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.
S-WAVE ON
Switches on/off the effects of Standing Wave Control. Fixed PCM When ON is selected, noise may be output during play-
(Standing Wave) OFF back of non-PCM sources. Please select another input ON
For discs created with standards other than Phase Con- signal if this is a problem.
Phase C+ trol, the LFE channel is delayed upon recording in the c 0 to 16 (ms) d Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie soundtracks AUTO
(Phase Control Plus) first place. This function corrects for phase shifting on Default: 6ms DRC
optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Digital Plus, MAX
such discs. (Dynamic Range
Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio (you
Control) MID
Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video, c 0.0 to 10.0 (frames) d may need to use this feature when listening to surround
<d>
DELAY so the soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the pic- 1 second = 30 frames sound at low volumes). OFF
(Sound Delay) ture. By adding a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to (NTSC)
match the presentation of the video. Default: 0.0
TONE Applies the treble and bass tone controls to a source, or BYPASS
(Tone Control) bypasses them completely. ON

50 En

Using other functions 09

Setting What it does Option(s) Setting What it does Option(s)
Some audio sources include ultra-low bass tones. Set the When you’re not using surround back speakers, select- OFF
V.SB
LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultra-low bass ing this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround
(Virtual Surround
tones from distorting the sound from the speakers. back channel through your surround speakers. You can
c OFF/ –20dB/ –15dB/ Back) ON
LFE The LFE is not limited when set to 0 dB, which is the choose to listen to sources with no surround back chan-
–10dB/ –5dB/ 0dB d <j>
(LFE Attenuate) recommended value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB, –15 dB nel information.
Default: 0dB
or –20 dB, the LFE is limited by the respective degree. V.HEIGHT When you’re not using front height speakers, selecting OFF
When OFF is selected, no sound is output from the LFE (Virtual Height) this mode allows you to hear a virtual front height chan-
channel. <k> nel through your front speakers. ON
SACD GAIN Brings out detail in SACDs by maximizing the dynamic 0dB OFF
When this mode is selected, the sound field expands
<e> range (during digital processing). +6dB V.DEPTH
virtually to behind the display, resulting in a sound field MIN
HDMI Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this AMP (Virtual Depth)
with the same depth as the 3D picture to achieve a better MID
(HDMI Audio) receiver (amp) or through to a TV. When THROUGH is <l>
sense of presence.
THROUGH MAX
<f> selected, no sound is output from this receiver.
This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video OFF a The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON.
delay between components connected with an HDMI b With the iPod/USB, HOME MEDIA GALLERY or ADAPTER PORT input function, by default S.RTRV is set to
A.DELAY ON.
cable. The audio delay time is set depending on the
(Auto delay) c UP1 to UP4 can be selected only when the front height speaker is connected. The presence or absence of
operational status of the display connected with an ON
<g> effects depends on the listening mode.
HDMI cable. The video delay time is automatically
adjusted according to the audio delay time. d The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select MAX or MID for signals other than
Dolby TrueHD.
C.WIDTH e You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch
(Center Width) Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spread- the gain setting back to 0dB.
(Applicable only ing the center channel between the front right and left c 0 to 7 d f ! The HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing synchronized amp mode operations.
when using a center speakers, making it sound wider (higher settings) or Default: 3 ! The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play the receiver’s HDMI audio and video input
speaker) narrower (lower settings). signals from the TV with the receiver’s power in the standby mode. See About synchronized operations on page
<h> 48 .
Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from g This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio/video synchronizing
DIMENSION c –3 to +3 d
front to back, making the sound more distant (minus capability (‘lipsync’) for HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A.DELAY to OFF and
<h> Default: 0
settings), or more forward (positive settings). adjust the delay time manually. For more details about the lipsync feature of your display, contact the manufac-
OFF turer directly.
PANORAMA Extends the front stereo image to include the surround
h Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music/Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.
<h> speakers for a ‘wraparound’ effect. ON
i Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 MUSIC/CINEMA mode.
C.IMAGE j ! You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when
(Center Image) Adjusts the center image to create a wider stereo effect c 0 to 10 d any of the stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.
(Applicable only with vocals. Adjust the effect from 0 (all center channel Defaults: ! You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set
when using a center sent to front right and left speakers) to 10 (center chan- Neo:6 MUSIC: 3 to NO or if Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2 is selected at Speaker System. It can also be used when Speaker B is
speaker) nel sent to the center speaker only). Neo:6 CINEMA: 10 selected at Speaker System and SP:dA+B ON is selected with the SPEAKERS button.
 k ! You can’t use the Virtual Height mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the
c 10 to 90 d stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.
Sets the effect level for the currently selected Advanced ! You can only use the Virtual Height mode if the surround speakers are on and the FH setting is set to NO. It
Defaults:
EFFECT Surround or ALC mode (each mode can be set sepa- can also not be used when playing signals containing actual front height channel information.
EXT.STEREO: 90
rately). l ! This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less.
Others: 50
! You can’t use the Virtual Depth mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the
Adjusts the output from the front height speaker when LOW
H.GAIN stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.
listening in 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode. If set to MID ! You can only use the Virtual Depth mode if the surround speakers are on.
(Height Gain)
HIGH, the sound from the top will be more emphasized. HIGH

En 51

Setting What it does Option(s)
Setting the Video options
STREAM This improves elements that reduce picture quality mainly OFF
There are a number of additional picture settings you can make using the VIDEO PARAMETER (Stream Smoother) noticeable in network contents, such as mosquito noise and
menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold. <e> block noise. ON

PDP
Sets the optimum picture quality for the type of monitor that
Important V.ADJ is connected. Select PDP for plasma displays, LCD for liquid LCD
! Note that if an option cannot be selected on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to (Advanced Video crystal monitors, FPJ for front projectors, PRO for profes- FPJ
the current source, setting and status of the receiver. Adjust) sional monitors. If you want to adjust the picture quality PRO
! All of the setting items can be set for each input function. settings to your personal tastes, select MEMORY.
MEMORY
! Setting items other than V.CONV can only be selected when V.CONV is set to ON.
YNR c 0 to +8 d
1 Press to the receiver operation mode, then press VIDEO PARAMETER. Reduces noise in the luminance (Y) signal.
<d, e> Default: 0
2 Use i/j to select the setting you want to adjust. CNR c 0 to +8 d
Reduces noise in the input’s color (C) signal.
Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be <d, e> Default: 0
selected. Check the table below for notes on this. BNR Reduces block noise (block-shaped distortion generated c 0 to +8 d
3 Use k/l to set as necessary. <d, e> upon MPEG compression) in the picture. Default: 0
See the table below for the options available for each setting. MNR Reduces mosquito noise (distortion generated at the con- c 0 to +8 d
<d, e> tours of the picture upon MPEG compression) in the picture. Default: 0
4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.
DETAIL c –4 to +4 d
Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
<d, e> Default: 0
Video parameter menu BRIGHT
c –6 to +6 d
(Brightness) Adjusts the overall brightness.
Setting What it does Option(s) Default: 0
<d, e>
V.CONV ON
Converts video signals for output from the MONITOR OUT CONTRAST c –6 to +6 d
(Digital Video Con- Adjusts the contrast between light and dark.
jacks (including HDMI OUT connector) for all video types <d, e> Default: 0
verter) OFF
(see page 16). HUE c –6 to +6 d
<a> Adjusts the red/green balance.
<d, e> Default: 0
AUTO
CHROMA
PURE c –6 to +6 d
Specifies the output resolution of the video signal (when (Chroma Level) Adjusts saturation from dull to bright.
480p Default: 0
RES video input signals are output at the HDMI OUT connector, <d, e>
(Resolution) select this according to the resolution of your monitor and 720p BLK SETUP Sets the black level according to the video input signal. 7.5
 the images you wish to watch). 1080i (Black Setup) Normally select 7.5. If the dark parts of the picture are all
(“480p” indicates the 480p/576p resolution setting.) <f> black with this setting, select 0. 0
1080p
Specifies the aspect ratio when input signals are output at THROUGH
1080/24p ASP
the HDMI output. Make your desired settings while checking
This setting optimizes the operation of the progressive AUTO (Aspect)
PCINEMA each setting on your display (if the image doesn’t match your NORMAL
scanning circuit for playing film materials. Normally set it <g>
(PureCinema) ON monitor type, cropping or black bands appear).
to AUTO. If the picture seems unnatural, switch this to ON
<c, e> OFF a If the video picture deteriorates when this settings is switched ON, switch it OFF.
or OFF.
b ! When set to a resolution with which the TV (monitor) is not compatible, no picture is output. Also, in some
P.MOTION cases no picture will be output due to copyright protection signals. In this case, change the setting.
Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video c –4 to +4 d
(Progressive Motion) ! When AUTO is selected, the resolution is selected automatically according to the capacity of the TV (monitor)
output is set to progressive. Default: 0
<c, e> connected by HDMI. When PURE is selected, the signals are output with the same resolution as when input
(see About the video converter on page 16 ).
! If this is set to something other than AUTO, PURE and 480i/576i analog signals are input, 480p/576p signals
are output from the component output terminals.
52 En


c ! This setting is valid for component outputs and HDMI output. ! SP: A+B ON – Sound is output from the The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the
! P.MOTION is disabled when PCINEMA is set to ON. A-speaker terminals (up to 5 channels, MULTI-ZONE control has been switched ON.
! This setting have the effect only for pictures recorded in the interlaced scan format (480i/576i or 1080i sig- depending on the source), the two speakers
nals). 2 Press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL on the
connected to the B-speaker terminals, and front panel to select the sub zone(s) you
d Adjustment is not possible unless V.ADJ (Advanced Video Adjust) is set to MEMORY.
the subwoofer. The sound from the B-speaker want.
e ! This setting is only displayed when the video signals below are being input:
— 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i analog video signals terminals will be the same as the sound If you selected ZONE 2&3 ON above, you can
— 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 1080p24 HDMI video signals from the A-speaker terminals (multichannel toggle between ZONE 2 and ZONE 3.
f This adjustment is only possible when 480i signals are being input from the composite video jacks. sources will be downmixed to 2 channels). ! When the receiver is on, make sure that any
g ! If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, adjust the aspect ratio on the source component or on the ! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the operations for the sub zone are done while
monitor. speakers. ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) show in
! This setting is only displayed when 480i/p or 576i/p video signals are being input.
the display. If this is not showing, the front
Note panel controls affect the main zone only.
(maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 ! The subwoofer output depends on the settings If the receiver is in standby, the display is
Switching the speaker channels are output. you made in Manual speaker setup on page 69 dimmed, and ZONE and your selected sub
terminals ! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the . However, if SP: B ON is selected above, no zone(s) continue to show in the display.
speakers. sound is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE
If you selected Normal(SB/FH), 3 Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select
When you select Normal(SB/FW), you can select channel is not downmixed).
Normal(SB/FW) or Speaker B at Speaker the source for the zone you have selected.
from: ! All speaker systems (except
system setting on page 69 , you can switch For example, ZONE 2 DVD sends the source
! SP: SB/FW ON – Surround back or front wide Speaker B connections) are switched off
between speakers using the SPEAKERS button. connected to the DVD inputs to the primary
channels are added to the front, center and when headphones are connected.
If you selected Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2, the (ZONE 2) sub room.
surround channels (maximum 5 channels)
button will simply switch your main speaker ! If you select TUNER, you can use the tuner
and a maximum of 7 channels are output. The
terminals on or off. controls to select a preset station (see Saving
surround back and front wide channels are Using the MULTI-ZONE controls
% Use SPEAKERS on the front panel to switched automatically according to the audio station presets on page 33 if you’re unsure
select a speaker system setting. The following steps use the front panel con- how to do this). The tuner cannot be tuned to
input signal.
As mentioned above, if you have selected trols to adjust the sub zone volume and select more than one station at a time. Therefore,
! SP: SB ON – Surround back channels are
Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2, the button will simply sources. See MULTI-ZONE remote controls on changing the station in one zone also
added to the front, center and surround
switch your main speaker terminal (A) on or off. page 54 . changes the station in the other zone. Please
channels (maximum 5 channels) and a
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker terminal maximum of 7 channels are output. be careful not to change stations when
option: ! SP: FW ON – Front wide channels are added Important recording a radio broadcast.
When you select Normal(SB/FH), you can select to the front, center and surround channels The explanations for ZONE 3 below only apply to 4 When Speaker System is set to ZONE 2,
from: (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 the VSX-53. use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust
! SP: SB/FH ON – Surround back or front height channels are output. the volume for the sub zone.
1 Press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the
channels are added to the front, center and ! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the front panel. 5 When you’re finished, press
surround channels (maximum 5 channels) speakers.
and a maximum of 7 channels are output. The
Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option: MULTI-ZONE CONTROL again to return to
When you select Speaker B, you can select from: ! ZONE 2 ON – Selects your primary (ZONE 2)
surround back and front height channels are the main zone controls.
! SP: A ON – Sound is output from the sub zone
switched automatically according to the audio You can also press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on
A-speaker terminals (up to 7 channels ! ZONE 2&3 ON – Select both sub zones
input signal. the front panel to switch off all output to the sub
(including surround back channels), ! ZONE 3 ON – Selects your secondary
! SP: SB ON – Surround back channels are zone(s).
depending on the source).
added to the front, center and surround
(ZONE 3) sub zone ! You won’t be able to switch the main zone
! SP: B ON – Sound is output from the two ! MULTI ZONE OFF – Switches the MULTI-
channels (maximum 5 channels) and a off completely unless you’ve switched off the
speakers connected to the B-speaker ZONE feature off
maximum of 7 channels are output. MULTI-ZONE control first.
terminals. Multichannel sources will not be
! SP: FH ON – Front height channels are added heard.
to the front, center and surround channels
En 53

! If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE ! The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the
feature for a while, turn off the power in both tone controls, for example), and surround Reducing the level of an Dimming the display
the sub and main rooms so that this receiver effects have no effect on the recorded signal. analog signal You can choose between four brightness levels
is in standby. ! Some digital sources are copy-protected, and for the front panel display. Note that when
The input attenuator lowers the input level of an
can only be recorded in analog. selecting sources, the display automatically
analog signal when it’s too strong. You can use
MULTI-ZONE remote controls ! Some video sources are copy-protected. These brightens for a few seconds.
this if you find that the OVER indicator lights
cannot be recorded.
Press the remote control’s ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 often or you can hear distortion in the sound. % Press to the receiver operation
Since the video converter is not available when
to operate the corresponding zone. The attenuator isn’t available with digital mode, then press DIMMER repeatedly to
making recordings (from the video OUT jacks)
The following table shows the possible MULTI- sources, or when using the Stream Direct change the brightness of the front panel
make sure to use the same type of video cable
ZONE remote controls: (ANALOG DIRECT) modes. display.
for connecting your recorder as you used to
% Press to the receiver operation ! You can also choose to turn the display off. In
Button(s) What it does connect your video source (the one you want to
mode, then press A.ATT to switch the this case, the FL OFF indicator lights.
Switches on/off power in the sub record) to this receiver. For example, you must
u connect your recorder using Component video input attenuator on or off.
zone.
if your source has also been connected using
INPUT Use to select the input function in
Component video.
Switching the HDMI output
SELECT the sub zone.
Using the sleep timer VSX-53 only
Use to select the input function 1 Select the source you want to record.
Input function The sleep timer switches the receiver into Set which terminal to use when outputting
directly (this may not work for some Use the input function buttons (or
buttons standby after a specified amount of time so
functions) in the sub zone. INPUT SELECT). video and audio signals from the HDMI output
MASTER
you can fall asleep without worrying about the terminals.
Use to set the listening volume in 2 Prepare the source you want to record.
VOLUME +/– receiver being left on all night. Use the remote The HDMI OUT 1 terminal is compatible with
the sub zone. Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video,
<a> control to set the sleep timer. the Control with HDMI function.
DVD etc.
Mutes the sound or restores the % Press to the receiver operation % Press to the receiver operation
sound if it has been muted (adjust- 3 Select the input signal according to the
MUTE mode, then press SLEEP repeatedly to set mode, then press HDMI OUT.
<a> ing the volume also restores the signal to be recorded.
the sleep time. Please wait a while when Please wait ... is
sound). Use the remote control’s SIGNAL SEL button.
displayed.
a You can only use this button when Speaker System 4 Prepare the recorder. 30 min 60 min
The output switches among HDMI OUT ALL,
is set to ZONE 2. Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 each time the
recording device and set the recording levels. Off 90 min
button is pressed.
Refer to the instructions that came with the ! The synchronized amp mode is canceled
Making an audio or a video ! You can check the remaining sleep time at
recorder if you are unsure how to do this. Most when the HDMI output is switched. If you wish
any time by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing
recording video recorders set the audio recording level
repeatedly will cycle through the sleep options to use the synchronized amp mode, switch to
You can make an audio or a video recording automatically-check the component’s instruc- HDMI OUT 1, then select the synchronized
again.
from the built-in tuner, or from an audio or video tion manual if you’re unsure. amp mode on the TV using the TV’s remote
! The sleep timer is valid for all zones. If
source connected to the receiver (such as a CD 5 Start recording, then start playback of any zone is on, the sleep timer continues control.
player or TV). the source component. functioning.
Keep in mind you can’t make a digital record-
ing from an analog source or vice-versa, so
make sure the components you are recording
to/from are hooked up in the same way (see
Connecting your equipment on page 11 for more
on connections).

54 En


Default system settings Setting Default
Checking your system settings
Sound Delay 0.0 frame
Use the status display screen to check your Setting Default
Dual Mono CH1
current settings for features such as surround Digital Video Converter ON
DRC AUTO
back channel processing and your current SPEAKERS SB/FH
MCACC preset. SACD Gain 0 dB
Normal
Speaker System LFE Attenuate 0 dB
1 Press to the receiver operation (SB/FH)
mode, then press STATUS to check the Auto delay OFF
Front SMALL
system settings. Center SMALL
Digital Safety OFF
The front panel display shows each of the fol- ExtendedStereo 90
FH/FW SMALL Effect Level
lowing settings for three seconds each: Input Speaker Setting Other modes 50
Surr SMALL
Source d Sampling Frequency d MCACC
Center Width 3
preset d ZONE 2 input d ZONE 3 input SB SMALLx2 2 PL II Music
Dimension 0
(VSX-53 only) d HDMI OUT (VSX-53 only). SW YES Options
Panorama OFF
2 When you’re finished, press STATUS Surround Position IN REAR
Neo:6
again to switch off the display. Crossover 80 Hz
CINEMA: 10
X-Curve OFF Neo:6 Options Center Image
Neo:6
DIMMER Brightest MUSIC: 3
Resetting the system Inputs 2 PL IIz Options Height Gain MID
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s See Input function default and possible settings on Listening Mode AUTO
settings to the factory default. Use the front page 28 . (2 ch/multi ch) SURROUND
panel controls to do this. Set MULTI-ZONE to All Inputs
HDMI Listening Mode
MULTI ZONE OFF. STEREO
HDMI Audio Amp (Headphones)
! Disconnect the iPod and USB memory device
VSX-53 only: HDMI OUT See also Setting the Audio options on page 50 for
from the receiver beforehand. other default DSP settings.
! Set the Control with HDMI to OFF (see HDMI HDMI output ALL
Control ON MCACC
Setup on page 47 ).
Control Mode PQLS M1:
1 Switch the receiver into standby. MCACC Position Memory
MEMORY 1
Display Power Off NO
2 While holding down ENTER on the Channel Level (M1 to M6) 0.0 dB
front panel, press u STANDBY/ON. Audio playback
Speaker Distance (M1 to M6) 10’00’’
The display shows RESET c NO d. Power On Level LAST
ATT of all chan-
Volume Limit OFF Standing Wave 0.0 dB
3 Select ‘RESET’ using PRESET k/l, nels/filters
Mute Level FULL (M1 to M6)
then press ENTER on the front panel. SWch Wide Trim 0.0 dB
The display shows RESET? OK. Phase Control ON All channels/
EQ Data (M1 0.0 dB
4 Press ENTER to confirm. iPod/USB, bands
HOME MEDIA to M6)
OK appears in the display to indicate that the EQ Wide Trim 0.0 dB
receiver has been reset to the factory default GALLERY, ON
Auto Sound ADAPTER PORT
settings. Retriever input function
! Note that all settings will be saved, even if the
Other input
receiver is unplugged. OFF
functions

En 55

10 Controlling the rest of your system

Controlling the rest of your system
using the component’s manufacturer preset
Note code stored in the remote.
! You can cancel or exit any of the steps by However, there are cases where only certain
pressing RCU SETUP. functions may be controllable after assigning
Setting What it does the proper preset code, or the codes for the
About the Remote Setup menu ! After one minute of inactivity, the remote
This is a setting for changing only the automatically exits the operation. manufacturer in the remote control will not
The Remote Setup mode is set by pressing the remote control unit’s operation screen, work for the model that you are using.
number button while pressing RCU SETUP. The without changing the receiver’s input,
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the
different items on the Remote Setup menu are when the remote control unit’s input
described below. For their setting procedures,
Direct
function buttons are pressed. This Operating multiple receivers component you want to control, you can still
function teach the remote individual commands from
refer to the explanations for the respective is convenient for using the remote Up to four receivers can be operated discretely
control unit for devices not connected another remote control (see Programming sig-
items. using this receiver’s remote control when using
to the receiver. See Direct function on nals from other remote controls on page 57 ).
multiple receivers, provided they are of the
Setting What it does page 57 . ! For greater convenience, assign the TV
same model as this receiver. The receiver to be
This function is used to erase remote connected to the MONITOR OUT terminal to
Preset codes can be set for the various operated is switched by inputting the preset
input functions. The remote control control codes that have been learned. the TV CTRL button, and assign your satellite/
code to set the remote control setting.
codes of a number of other devices Erase Codes learned for the different input cable receiver or set-top box connected to the
! Set the remote modes on the receivers before
Preset (including products of other brands) learning functions can be erased individually. TV/SAT input terminal to the TV/SAT input
See Erasing one of the remote control
using this function (see Remote Control Mode
recall are preset in the remote control to button. If a single device is connected to both
button settings on page 57 . Setup on page 74 ).
allow these devices to be operated. terminals, that device should be assigned to
See Selecting preset codes directly on The backlight lighting pattern can be 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press both the TV CTRL and TV/SAT input buttons.
page 56 . selected from among four modes, in ‘4’ for three seconds. ! Devices may be assigned to the following
If the desired operations cannot be Back light consideration of convenience and Release the button after the LED flashes once. input function buttons.
performed even though you have set battery service life. See Setting the The LED continues to flash.
Code the preset codes, the remote control backlight mode on page 58 . ! To cancel the preset setup mode press RECEIVER MULTI SOURCE
OPERATION
learning signals of other devices can be learned This is a function for resetting preset RCU SETUP.
directly. See Programming signals from codes that have been set. Key reset-
RCU SETUP

other remote controls on page 57 . Reset ting can be done for individual input 2 Press the number button for the BDR
BD DVD DVR HDMI

A series of the remote control opera- function functions. See Erasing all learnt set- receiver (“Receiver 1” to “Receiver 4”) you SAT

tions for starting listening or viewing tings that are in one input function on wish to operate. TV CD HMG ADPT

USB OPTION
Multi can be programmed. Multiple remote page 57 . For example, to operate “Receiver 2”, press ‘2’. iPod TUNER SIRIUS

operation control codes can be set for the differ- This is a function for resetting all If the LED lights for one second and continues INPUT SELECT TV CTRL RECEIVER

ent input functions. See Multi Opera- remote control unit settings you have to flash, the setting has been successfully
tion and System Off on page 58 . All reset made to the defaults set upon ship- completed.
This is a function for automatically ment from the factory. See Resetting When the preset code is input, the LED flashes
turning off the power of devices con- the remote control settings on page 59 . three times to indicate that the setting has
System nected to the receiver. Multiple remote If you have multiple Pioneer receivers, failed.
Selecting preset codes directly
off control codes can be set, as desired. amplifiers, etc., this setting can be
See Multi Operation and System Off on
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
Change used to prevent other units from oper-
page 58 . RC mode ating simultaneously when the remote
‘1’ for three seconds.
control unit is operated. See Operating
Setting the remote to control Release the button after the LED flashes once.
multiple receivers on page 56 . other components The LED continues to flash.
Most components can be assigned to one of ! To cancel the preset setup mode press
the input function buttons (such as DVD or CD) RCU SETUP.

56 En

Controlling the rest of your system 10

2 Press the input function button for the AUDIO VIDEO
4 Press the corresponding button on 2 Press the input function button
RECEIVER MULTI SOURCE PARAMETER PARAMETER
component you want to control. OPERATION
LIST TUNE TOOLS the other remote control that is sending corresponding to the command to be
When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL, RCU SETUP TOP MENU
BAND
T.EDIT
GUIDE
(teaching) the signal to this receiver’s erased, then press ENTER.
press TV CTRL here. BD DVD
BDR
DVR HDMI PRESET ENTER PRESET
remote control. The LED flashes once.
The LED blinks once and flashes continuously. SAT If the LED lights for one second and continues 3 Press and hold the button to be erased
TV CD HMG ADPT

3 Use the number buttons to enter the USB OPTION
CATEGORY RETURN
to flash, the setting has been successfully for three seconds.
HOME

4-digit preset code.
iPod TUNER SIRIUS
iPod CTRL
MENU TUNE
completed. If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has
TV CTRL RECEIVER
! If the LED flashes for five seconds, it means
INPUT SELECT
AUTO / ALC / PGM MEMORY MENU
See Preset code list on page 96 . DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
HDD DVD
been successfully completed.
If the LED lights for one second and continues MASTER
the memory is full. See Erasing all learnt
INPUT VOLUME THX PHASE CTRL STATUS
settings that are in one input function on 4 Repeat step 3 to erase other buttons.
to flash, the setting has been successfully
completed.
TV CONTROL TV / DTV MPX PQLS
page 57 to erase a programmed button 5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the erasing
When the preset code is fully input, the LED CH VOL MUTE HDMI OUT AUDIO you’re not using to free up more memory mode.
1 2 3
flashes three times to indicate that the setting SIGNAL SEL MCACC SLEEP INFO
(note that some signals may take more
has failed. If this happens, enter the 4-digit
4 5 6 DISP memory than others).
preset code again.
CH LEVEL A.ATT
7 8
DIMMER
9 ! Note that interference from TVs or other Erasing all learnt settings that
4 Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the other
D.ACCESS
/ CLR 0
CLASS
ENTER
CH
devices will sometimes result in the remote are in one input function
control learning the wrong signal.
components you want to control.
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 LIGHT
This operation erases all the operational
! Some commands from other remote controls
To try out the remote control, switch the com- settings of other devices that have been pro-
cannot be learned, but in most cases the
ponent on or off (into standby) by pressing u grammed in one input function, and restores
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press remotes just need to be moved closer
SOURCE. If it doesn’t seem to work, select the the factory default.
‘2’ for three seconds. together or farther apart.
next code from the list (if there is one). This function is handy for erasing all data pro-
Release the button after the LED flashes once. 5 To program additional signals for the grammed for devices no longer being used.
5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the preset current component repeat steps 3 and 4.
The LED continues to flash.
setup mode. 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
! To cancel the preset setup mode press To program signals for another component, exit
RCU SETUP. and repeat steps 2 through 4.
Release the button after the LED flashes once.
Programming signals from 2 Press the input function button for the 6 Press RCU SETUP to exit the The LED continues to flash.
component you want to control. programming mode. ! To cancel the preset setup mode press
other remote controls
The LED blinks once and flashes continuously. RCU SETUP.
If the preset code for your component is not
3 Point the two remote controls towards 2 Press and hold the input function
available, or the available preset codes do not
each other, then press the button that will Erasing one of the remote button corresponding to the command to
operate correctly, you can program signals from
be doing the learning on this receiver’s control button settings be erased for three seconds.
the remote control of another component. This
can also be used to program additional opera- remote control. This erases one of the buttons you have pro- If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has
tions (buttons not covered in the presets) after The LED flashes once, then stops flashing, grammed and restores the button to the factory been successfully completed.
assigning a preset code. remaining lit. default.
The remote can store about 120 preset codes ! The remote controls should be 3 cm (1 inch) 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
from other components (this has been tested apart.
‘7’ for three seconds. Direct function
with codes of Pioneer format only). Release the button after the LED flashes once. ! Default setting: On
Certain buttons represent operations that can- The LED continues to flash. You can use the direct function feature to con-
not be learned from other remote controls. The 3 cm ! To cancel the preset setup mode press trol one component using the remote control
(1 inch)
buttons available are shown below: Other remote RCU SETUP. while at the same time, using your receiver to
This receiver’s
remote control control playback a different component. This could let

En 57


you, for example, use the remote control to set 2 Press the number button for the 3. Transmit a sequence of up to five pro- off correctly. Program the receiver to perform
up and listen to a CD on the receiver, and then backlight mode you want to set. grammed commands. these commands if the non-Pioneer device
use the remote control to rewind a tape in your ! ‘1’ (normal mode) – The backlight is turned Similar to Multi operations, System off allows uses separate signals for power on/off.
VCR while you continue to listen to your CD on and off with the light button. After it lights, you to use two buttons to stop and switch off
player. it turns off automatically if no operation is a series of components in your system at the Programming a multi-operation
When direct function is on, any component you performed for 10 seconds. same time. Only one System off operation
or a shutdown sequence
select (using the input function buttons) will be ! ‘2’ (frequent lighting mode) – The backlight sequence may be programmed.
selected by both the receiver and the remote turns on when any button on the remote Press MULTI OPERATION and then u SOURCE 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press
control. When you turn direct function off, you control is pressed. It is turned off with to: ‘3’ for three seconds.
can operate the remote control without affect- the light button. After it lights, it turns off 1. Transmit a sequence of up to five pro- Release the button after the LED flashes once.
ing the receiver. automatically if no operation is performed for grammed commands. The LED continues to flash.
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press 10 seconds. 2. Switch off all Pioneer devices including the ! To cancel the preset setup mode press
‘5’ for three seconds. ! ‘3’ (eco mode) – The backlight is turned on receiver (except DVD recorders and VCRs). RCU SETUP.
Release the button after the LED flashes once. and off with the light button. After it lights, For greater convenience, program this receiver 2 Press the input function button (or u
The LED continues to flash. it turns off automatically if no operation is to perform power on/off and playback opera- SOURCE button).
! To cancel the preset setup mode press performed for 5 seconds. tions on non-Pioneer devices as well. (The For Multi operations, press the input function
RCU SETUP. ! ‘4’ (off mode) – The backlight does not turn signals for Pioneer devices described above you wish to program (for example, if you want
on even when the light button is pressed. are not contingent on programming for non- to start the sequence by switching on your DVD
2 Press the input function button for the If the LED lights for one second and continues Pioneer devices.)
component you want to control. player, press DVD).
to flash, the setting has been successfully The buttons that can be programmed using ! With Multi operation, the HDMI and TV CTRL
3 Press ‘1’ (On) or ‘0’ (Off) to switch the completed. Multi operation or System off are the same but- settings cannot be made. For other settable
direct function mode. If the LED flashes three times, the setting has tons as those that can be programmed for other input functions, see Setting the remote to
If the LED lights for one second and continues failed. remote controls (see Programming signals from control other components on page 56 .
to flash, the setting has been successfully 3 Press RCU SETUP to exit the setup. other remote controls on page 57 ). For System off, press the u SOURCE button.
completed. The LED blinks twice and flashes continuously.
If the LED flashes three times, the setting has Note
failed. 3 If necessary, press the input function
Multi Operation and System ! Before Multi operation and System off will button for the component whose
4 Press RCU SETUP to exit the setup. Off work correctly, you must setup the remote to command you want to input.
work with your TV and other components (see This is only necessary if the command is for a
The Multi operation feature allows you to
Setting the remote to control other components new component (input function).
program a series of up to 5 commands for the
Setting the backlight mode on page 56 for more on this).
components in your system. 4 Select the button for the command
! Default setting: 1 (normal mode) ! Some units may take some time to power up,
! Be sure to call up the preset codes of devices you want to input.
The backlight lighting pattern can be selected in which case multiple operations may not be
or perform programming signals for other The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.
from among four modes, in consideration of possible.
remote controls before multi operation ! You don’t need to program the receiver to
convenience and battery service life. ! Power on and off commands only work with
memory programming (page 57). switch on or off. This is done automatically.
components that have a standby mode.
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press The Multi operation feature makes it easy to With Pioneer components, you don’t need to
! Some remote controllers for other
‘6’ for three seconds. perform the following operations by pressing program the power to switch off in a shutdown
manufacturers’ devices use the same signals
Release the button after the LED flashes once. just two buttons. sequence (except DVD recorders).
for switching the power on and off. In some
The LED continues to flash. Press MULTI OPERATION and then the DVD
cases, even if this receiver is programmed to
! To cancel the preset setup mode press input function button to:
perform these commands, power to the non-
RCU SETUP. 1. Switch this receiver on.
Pioneer devices may not be switched on and
2. Switch this receiver’s input to DVD.

58 En


5 Repeat steps 3 to 4 to program a ! To cancel the preset setup mode press
sequence of up to five commands. RCU SETUP. Controlling components
If you press RCU SETUP before programming is 2 Press the input function button This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes (see Setting the remote
completed, commands programmed up to that containing the program you want to to control other components on page 56 for more on this). Use the input function buttons to select
point will be stored. cancel or the u SOURCE button for three the component.
6 Press RCU SETUP to exit the seconds. ! The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the
programming mode. If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has TV CTRL button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the TV CTRL button.
been successfully completed. RECEIVER MULTI SOURCE
OPERATION

Using multi operations RCU SETUP

BDR

1 Press MULTI OPERATION. Resetting the remote control BD

SAT
DVD DVR HDMI

Release the button after the LED flashes once. settings TV CD HMG ADPT

USB OPTION
iPod TUNER SIRIUS

Use this procedure to reset all the remote con- INPUT SELECT TV CTRL RECEIVER

2 Within five seconds, press an input trol’s settings to the factory default.
function button that has been set up with ! When preset codes are set, all the signals INPUT
MASTER
VOLUME

a multi operation. learned in the input function buttons are TV CONTROL

The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) cleared. This function is convenient when you CH VOL MUTE

and the programmed multi operation is per- want to reset some but not all of input function AUDIO VIDEO

formed automatically. buttons.
PARAMETER
LIST TUNE TOOLS
PARAMETER

TOP MENU T.EDIT

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press BAND GUIDE

Using System off ‘0’ for three seconds.
PRESET ENTER PRESET

1 Press MULTI OPERATION. Release the button after the LED flashes once. CATEGORY

HOME
RETURN

TUNE
MENU

iPod CTRL
AUTO / ALC / PGM MEMORY MENU
DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR

The LED continues to flash. 2 Press and hold the ENTER button for HDD DVD


2 Within five seconds, press u SOURCE. three seconds.
If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has
TV / DTV MPX PQLS

The command sequence you programmed will
run, then all Pioneer components will switch been successfully completed. 1
HDMI OUT
2 3
AUDIO

off, followed by this receiver (switch of all the 4 5 6 DISP

zones becomes off). Default preset codes CH LEVEL A.ATT
7 8
DIMMER
9

! In order to avoid accidently switching off a D.ACCESS CLASS CH
/ CLR 0 ENTER

DVD recorder that is currently recording, no Input function button Preset code ZONE 2 ZONE 3 LIGHT

DVD recorder power off codes are sent. DVD 2158
BD 2160
Erasing the settings for the DVR/BDR 2150 RECEIVER

multi-operation HDMI 2159
This erases all the settings programmed in the TV/SAT 0116
remote control for the multi-operation. CD 5066
1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press TV CTRL 0116
En 59

TV and Audio/Video components Audio/Video components

TV HDD/BDR/ Button(s) LD CD/CD-R/SACD MD/DAT TAPE
Button(s) TV BD/DVD VCR SAT/CATV
(Monitor) DVR u SOURCE POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF
POWER ON/ POWER ON/ POWER ON/ POWER ON/ POWER POWER ON/ Number buttons numerics numerics numerics —
u SOURCE
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON/OFF OFF
CLEAR
Number buttons numerics numerics numerics numerics numerics numerics !/CLR +10 >10/CLEAR CLEAR
<a>
!/CLR k (dot) KURO LINK CLEAR + — * OPEN/CLOSE
ENTER (CLASS) ENTER DISC/ENTER ENTER
ENTER (CLASS) CH ENTER CH ENTER ENTER ENTER — ENTER <a>

EXIT/INFO EXIT TOP MENU TOP MENU — LIST TOP MENU — — MSc

TOOLS/ TOOLS LEGATO LINK
USER MENU GUIDE — GUIDE — — MSd
GUIDE/EPG <a> 
i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l — i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l — — e/g/m/n
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER — ENTER ENTER ENTER — — —

HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU — HOME MENU SACD SETUP
— — —

RETURN RETURN RETURN RETURN — RETURN
RETURN — — —
HDD (Red) Red Red — HDD — Red
d d d d d
DVD (Green) Green Green — DVD — Green
e e e e e
(Yellow) Yellow Yellow — VCR — Yellow
g g g g g
(Blue) Blue Blue MENU MENU — Blue m m m m m
d — — d d d d n n n n n
e — AUTO SETUP e e e e o o o o o
g — FREEZE g g g g p p p p p
m — — m m m m PURE AUDIO
AUDIO AUDIO — —
n — — n n n n 

o ANT AV SELECTION o o — o TIME
DISP DISPLAY/INFO — —

p — SCREEN SIZE p p — p
a Controls for MD.
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
b Controls for SACD.
DISPLAY/
DISP DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY —
INFO
OUTPUT
RESOLUTION
CH +/– CH +/– CH +/– CH +/– CH +/– CH +/–
+/–
<a>
a Controls for BD.

60 En


TV (Projector)

Button(s) TV (Projector)
u SOURCE POWER ON
1 MOVIE
2 STANDARD
3 DYNAMIC
4 USER1
5 USER2
6 USER3
7 COLOR+
8 SHARP+
9 GAMMA
0 COLOR–
!/CLR SHARP–
ENTER (CLASS) COLOR TEMP

EXIT

INFO

i/j/k/l i/j/k/l
ENTER ENTER
TEST

HIDE

MENU
m HDMI1
d HDMI2
n COMP.
o VIDEO
e S-VIDEO
g BRIGHT–
p BRIGHT+
AUDIO POWER OFF
DISP ASPECT
CH +/– CONTRAST+/–

En 61

11 The Advanced MCACC menu

The Advanced MCACC menu ! The screen saver will automatically appear be switched on and off in the respective
after five minutes of inactivity. MCACC preset. For details, see Setting
the Audio options on page 50 .
! EQ Type (only available when
4 Select the setting you want to adjust. CAUTION
Making receiver settings from the Auto MCACC Menu above is
! Full Auto MCACC – See Automatically ! The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup
EQ Pro & S-Wave) – This determines how
the Advanced MCACC menu conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto are output at high volume.
the frequency balance is adjusted.
The Advanced MCACC (Multi Channel ACoustic MCACC) on page 26 for a quick and effective 1 Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the After a single calibration is performed, each
Calibration) system was developed in Pioneer’s automatic surround setup. Advanced MCACC menu, then press of the following three correction curves can
laboratories with the aim of making it possible ! Auto MCACC – See Automatic MCACC ENTER. be stored separately in the MCACC memory.
for home users to perform adjustments of the (Expert) on page 62 for a more detailed If the Advanced MCACC screen is not dis- SYMMETRY implements symmetric correc-
same level as in a studio easily and with high MCACC setup. played, refer to Making receiver settings from the tion for each pair of left and right speakers
precision. The acoustic characteristics of the VSX-53 only: In addition, the Full Band Phase Advanced MCACC menu on page 62 . to flatten the frequency-amplitude charac-
listening environment are measured and the Control function calibrates the frequency- 2 Select the parameters you want to set. teristics. ALL CH ADJ is a ‘flat’ setting where
frequency response is calibrated accordingly phase characteristics of the connected Use i/j to select the item, then use k/l to all the speakers are set individually so no
to allow high precision, automatic analysis and speakers. set. special weighting is given to any one channel.
optimal calibration of the sound field to bring it ! Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker ! Auto MCACC – The default is ALL FRONT ALIGN sets all speakers in accordance
closer to a studio environment than ever before. settings and customizes the Acoustic (recommended), but you can limit the system with the front speaker settings (no equalization
Furthermore, while it was previously difficult Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on calibration to only one setting (to save time) if is applied to the front left and right channels).
to eliminate standing waves, this receiver is page 64 ). you want. If you selected ALL or Keep SP System as
equipped with a standing wave control function ! Demo – No settings are saved and no errors — When data measurement is taken (after your Auto MCACC menu, you can specify the
using a unique process to perform acoustic occur. When the speakers are connected selecting ALL or Keep SP System), the MCACC preset where you want to save the
analysis and reduce their influence. to this receiver, the test tone is output reverb characteristics data (both before- SYMMETRY, ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN
This section describes how to calibrate the repeatedly. Press RETURN to cancel the test and after-calibration) that this receiver settings.
sound field automatically and fine-adjust the tone. had been storing will be overwritten. ! THX Speaker (only available when the
sound field data manually. — When measurement is performed Auto MCACC Menu above is ALL or
1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the with other than SYMMETRY (after Speaker Setting) – Select YES when using
receiver and your TV.
Automatic MCACC (Expert) selecting ALL or Keep SP System), THX speakers (all speakers other than the
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this If your setup requires more detailed settings the reverberation characteristics after front speakers are set to SMALL). In other
receiver. than those provided in Automatically conducting calibration cannot be predicted, so cases, leave at NO.
optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on the graph for the characteristics after ! STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only available
2 Press on the remote control,
page 26 , you can customize your setup options calibration (“After”) cannot be displayed. when the Auto MCACC Menu above
then press HOME MENU.
below. You can calibrate your system differently If you will need to display the graph for is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – In addition to
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
for up to six different MCACC presets, which are the characteristics after calibration measurements at the listening position,
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and
useful if you have different listening positions (“After”), take the measurement using you can use two more reference points for
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
depending on the type of source (for example, the EQ Professional menu in the which test tones will be analyzed for standing
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video Manual MCACC setup (page 64). waves. This is useful if you want to get a
current menu.
game close to the TV). — The EQ Pro & S-Wave measurement is balanced ‘flat’ calibration for several seating
! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the
also taken when ALL or Keep SP System positions in your listening area. Place the
Home Menu.
is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ microphone at the reference point indicated
3 Select ‘Advanced MCACC’ from the Important
Professional on page 65 for more on this. on-screen and note that the last microphone
! Make sure the microphone/speakers are not
Home Menu, then press ENTER. — Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ placement will be at your main listening
moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.
Professional and Standing Wave can position:

62 En

The Advanced MCACC menu 11

6 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s ! The subwoofer distance setting may be
2nd reference 3rd reference finish outputting test tones. wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the farther than the actual distance from the
point point A progress report is displayed on-screen while speaker connections. listening position. This setting should
1 2 the receiver outputs test tones to determine — If the connections were wrong, turn off be accurate (taking delay and room
the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as the power, disconnect the power cord, characteristics into account) and generally
quiet as possible while it’s doing this. then reconnect properly. After this, does not need to be changed.
3
Main listening ! With error messages (such as Too much perform the Auto MCACC procedure ! If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results
position ambient noise! or Check microphone.), again. are incorrect due to the interaction of the
select RETRY after checking for ambient — If the connections were right, select speakers and viewing environment, we
noise (see Problems when using the Auto GO NEXT and continue. recommend adjusting the settings manually.
3 Connect the microphone to the MCACC MCACC Setup on page 27 ) and verifying the You can also choose to view the settings by
8 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press
SETUP MIC jack on the front panel. mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be selecting individual parameters from the
ENTER.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT MCACC Data Check screen (see Checking
A progress report is displayed on-screen while
speakers and the microphone. and continue. MCACC Data on page 66 ).
the receiver outputs more test tones to deter-
! Do not adjust the volume during the test mine the optimum receiver settings. Press RETURN after you have finished check-
MULTI-ZONE iPod iPhone iPad AUTO SURR/ALC/ tones. This may result in incorrect speaker Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is ing each screen. When you’re finished, select
DIRECT CONTROL STREAM DIRECT
RETURN to go back to the Home Menu.
CONTROL ON/OFF
settings. happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
7 If necessary, confirm the speaker ! If you selected a STAND.WAVE Multi-Point Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this
setup (in step 2), you will be asked to place receiver upon completion of the Auto MCACC
configuration in the GUI screen.
PHONES MCACC USB
the mic at the 2nd and 3rd reference points Setup.
SETUP MIC 5V 2.1 A
The configuration shown on-screen should
reflect the actual speakers you have. before finally placing it at your main listening
iPod iPhone iPad
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds position.
while the speaker configuration check screen 9 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure
Microphone is being displayed, the Auto MCACC Setup will is completed and the Advanced MCACC
resume automatically. In this case, you don’t menu reappears automatically.
need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in step 8. The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup
! If you see an ERR message (or the speaker should give you excellent surround sound
configuration displayed isn’t correct), from your system, but it is also possible to
Tripod
there may be a problem with the speaker adjust these settings manually using the
connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, Manual MCACC setup menu (starting below)
If you have a tripod, use it to place the micro- turn off the power and check the speaker or Manual SP Setup menu (starting on page
phone so that it’s about ear level at your connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a 69).
normal listening position. If you do not have problem, you can simply use i/j to select ! Depending on the characteristics of your
a tripod, use some other object to install the the speaker and k/l to change the setting room, sometimes identical speakers with
microphone. and continue. cone sizes of around 12 cm (5 inches) will
! It may not be possible to measure correctly ! If the speaker is not pointed to the end up with different size settings. You
if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa, microphone (listening position) or when can correct the setting manually using the
etc. using speakers that affect the phase Manual speaker setup on page 69 .
4 When you’re finished setting the (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.),
Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the
options, select START then press ENTER.
speakers are properly connected.
5 Follow the instructions on-screen.

En 63


! Fine Channel Level – Make fine adjustments ! After pressing ENTER, test tones will be make the two tones sound as if they are arriving
Manual MCACC setup to the overall balance of your speaker system output. simultaneously at a position slightly in front of
You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC (see Fine Channel Level on page 64 ). 3 Select each channel in turn and adjust you and between your arm span.
setup menu to make detailed adjustments ! Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay the levels (+/–12.0 dB) as necessary. ! If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting
when you’re more familiar with the system. settings for your speaker system (see Fine Use k/l to adjust the volume of the speaker the distance setting, you may need to change
Before making these settings, you should have Speaker Distance on page 64 ). you selected to match the reference speaker. the angle of your speakers very slightly.
already completed Automatically conducting ! Standing Wave – Control overly resonant When it sounds like both tones are the same ! The subwoofer’s test tone differs in tone from
optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on low frequencies in your listening room (see volume, press j to confirm and continue to the other channels. Adjust so that the sound
page 26 . Standing Wave on page 64 ). next channel. of the subwoofer can be heard distinctly.
You only need to make these settings once The last two settings are specifically for cus- ! For comparison purposes, the reference Note that when adjusting the subwoofer,
(unless you change the placement of your cur- tomizing the parameters explained in Acoustic speaker will change depending on which depending on the low frequency response of
rent speaker system or add new speakers). Calibration EQ Adjust on page 65 : speaker you select. your speaker, it may be difficult to hear the
! EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency ! If you want to go back and adjust a channel, change even when the setting is increased
balance of your speaker system while simply use i/j to select it. or decreased or when the position of the
CAUTION listening to test tones (see Acoustic speaker is changed. Note that it may be
! The test tones used in the Manual MCACC 4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
Calibration EQ Adjust on page 65 ). difficult to compare this tone with the other
setup are output at high volume. You will return to the Manual MCACC setup
! EQ Professional – Calibrate your system speakers in your setup (depending on the
based on the direct sound coming menu. low frequency response of the reference
Important from the speakers and make detailed speaker).
! Press the MCACC button while the pertinent settings according to your room’s reverb Fine Speaker Distance
setup screens are displayed to select MCACC characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ ! Default setting: 10’00’’ (all speakers)
presets. Professional on page 65 ). For proper sound depth and separation with
! For some of the settings below, you’ll have to your system, it is necessary to add a slight bit of
connect the setup microphone to the front Fine Channel Level delay to some speakers so that all sounds will
panel and place it about ear level at your arrive at the listening position at the same time.
! Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels)
normal listening position. Press HOME MENU You can adjust the distance of each speaker When it sounds like the delay settings are
You can achieve better surround sound by
to display the Home Menu before you in half inch increments. The following setting matched up, press j to confirm and continue
properly adjusting the overall balance of your
connect the microphone to this receiver. can help you make detailed adjustments that to the next channel.
speaker system. You can adjust the Channel
! See Problems when using the Auto MCACC you may not achieve using the Manual speaker ! For comparison purposes, the reference
Level of each speaker in 0.5 dB increments. The
Setup on page 27 for notes regarding high setup on page 69 . speaker will change depending on which
following setting can help you make detailed
background noise levels and other possible speaker you select.
adjustments that you may not achieve using the 1 Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the
interference. ! If you want to go back and adjust a channel,
Manual speaker setup on page 69 . Manual MCACC setup menu.
! If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and simply use i/j to select it.
turn up the volume to the middle position. 1 Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the 2 Adjust the distance of the left channel
Manual MCACC setup menu. from the listening position. 4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
1 Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the You will return to the Manual MCACC setup
The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference 3 Select each channel in turn and adjust
Advanced MCACC menu. menu.
level. the distance as necessary.
See Making receiver settings from the Advanced
MCACC menu on page 62 if you’re not already 2 Adjust the level of the left channel. Use k/l to adjust the delay of the speaker you
at this screen. This will be the reference speaker level, so you selected to match the reference speaker. Standing Wave
may want to keep the level around 0.0dB so that Listen to the reference speaker and use it to ! Default setting: ON/ATT 0.0dB (all filters)
2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
you’ll have plenty of room to adjust the other measure the target channel. From the listening Acoustic standing waves occur when, under
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might
speaker levels. position, face the two speakers with your arms certain conditions, sound waves from your
want to make these settings in order.
outstretched pointing at each speaker. Try to speaker system resonate mutually with sound

64 En


waves reflected off the walls in your listen- Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of ! Reverb View – You can check the reverb
ing area. This can have a negative effect on room equalizer for your speakers (excluding the
Acoustic Calibration EQ measurements made for specified frequency
the overall sound, especially at certain lower subwoofer). It works by measuring the acoustic Professional ranges in each channel.
frequencies. Depending on speaker place- characteristics of your room and neutralizing This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of — If the Reverb View procedure is
ment, your listening position, and ultimately the ambient characteristics that can color the room reverberation by allowing you to calibrate performed after the Automatically
the shape of your room, it results in an overly original source material (providing a ‘flat’ equal- your system based on the direct sound coming conducting optimum sound tuning
resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The Standing Wave ization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the from the speakers. (Full Auto MCACC) on page 26 or
Control uses filters to reduce the effect of overly adjustment provided in Automatically conduct- Performing the Acoustic Calibration EQ Reverb Measurement operation,
resonant sounds in your listening area. During ing optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) Professional procedure is effective when the depending on the standing wave control
playback of a source, you can customize the on page 26 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on lower frequencies seem overly reverberant in setting, differences may appear on the
filters used for Standing Wave Control for each page 62 , you can also adjust these settings your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’) as reverb graph. With the Auto MCACC
of your MCACC presets. manually to get a frequency balance that suits shown at Type A below, or when different chan- function, the reverberations are
! Standing Wave control filter settings cannot your tastes. nels seem to exhibit different reverb character- measured with the standing waves
be changed during playback of sources using 1 Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the istics as shown at Type B. controlled, so the reverb characteristics
the HDMI connection. Manual MCACC setup menu. ! Type A: Reverberance of high vs. low graph shows the characteristics with the
1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the frequencies effect of the standing waves eliminated.
2 Select the channel(s) you want and By contrast, the Reverb Measurement
Manual MCACC setup menu. adjust to your liking. Level
Low
frequencies function measures the reverberations
2 Adjust the parameters for the Standing Use i/j to select the channel. High without controlling the standing waves,
frequencies
Wave Control. Use k/l to select the frequency and i/j so the graph indicates the reverb
! Filter Channel – Select the channel to which to boost or cut the EQ. When you’re finished, Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro. Conventional MCACC
characteristics including the effect
calibration range EQ calibration range
you will apply the filter(s): MAIN (all except go back to the top of the screen and press k Time of the standing waves. If you wish to
center channel and subwoofer), Center or to return to Ch, then use i/j to select the 0 80 160 (in msec)
check the reverb characteristics of the
SW (subwoofer). channel. room itself (with the standing waves
! TRIM (only available when the filter channel ! The OVER! indicator shows in the display ! Type B: Reverb characteristics for
different channels as such), we recommend using the
above is SW) – Adjust the subwoofer channel if the frequency adjustment is too drastic Reverb Measurement function.
level (to compensate for the difference in and might distort. If this happens, bring the Level Front L ! Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the
output post-filter). level down until OVER! disappears from the time period that will be used for frequency
Front R
! Freq / Q / ATT – These are the filter display. adjustment and calibration, based on the
parameters where Freq represents the 3 When you’re finished, press RETURN. Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro. Conventional MCACC reverb measurement of your listening area.
frequency you will be targeting and Q is the You will return to the Manual MCACC setup
calibration range EQ calibration range
Note that customizing system calibration
Time
bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower menu. 0 80 160 (in msec) using this setup will alter the settings you
the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation made in Automatically conducting optimum
(ATT, the amount of reduction to the targeted sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 26
frequency). Note Using Acoustic Calibration EQ
! Changing the frequency curve of one channel or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 62 and
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN. Professional is not necessary if you’re satisfied with these
too drastically will affect the overall balance. If
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup the speaker balance seems uneven, you can 1 Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press settings.
menu. raise or lower channel levels using test tones ENTER. 3 If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’,
with the TRIM feature. Use k/l to select 2 Select an option and press ENTER. select EQ ON or EQ OFF, and then START.
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust TRIM, then use i/j to raise or lower the ! Reverb Measurement – Use this to The following options determine how the reverb
! Default setting: ON/0.0dB (all channels/ channel level for the current speaker. measure the reverb characteristics before characteristics of your listening area are dis-
bands) and after calibration. played in Reverb View:

En 65


! EQ OFF – You will see the reverb markers on the vertical axis indicate decibels in 5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
characteristics of your listening area without 2 dB steps. Checking MCACC Data You will return to the Home Menu.
the equalization performed by this receiver 5 If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, At the procedure of Automatically conducting
(before calibration). select the MCACC memory to be stored, optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on Speaker Setting
! EQ ON – You will see the reverb then enter the desired time setting for page 26 , the procedure of Automatic MCACC
Use this to display the speaker size and number
characteristics of your listening area with the calibration, and then select START. (Expert) on page 62 or after fine-adjusting at
of speakers. See Speaker Setting on page 69 for
equalization performed by this receiver (after ! To specify the place where the MCACC Manual MCACC setup on page 64 , you can
more on this.
calibration). Note that the EQ response may memory is to be stored, press MCACC to check your calibrated settings using the GUI
not appear entirely flat due to adjustments screen. 1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the
select the MCACC memory you want to store.
necessary for your listening area. MCACC Data Check menu.
Based on the reverb measurement above, you 1 Press on the remote control,
— The calibration corresponding to the can choose the time period that will be used for 2 Select the channel you want to check.
currently selected MCACC preset will be the final frequency adjustment and calibration. Use i/j to select the channel. The corre-
used when EQ ON is selected. To use Even though you can make this setting without sponding channel on the layout diagram is
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and
another MCACC preset, press MCACC to reverb measurement, it is best to use the mea- highlighted.
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select the MCACC memory you want to surement results as a reference for your time select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
store. setting. For an optimal system calibration based
— After auto calibration with EQ Type
current menu. Channel Level
on the direct sound coming from the speakers,
: SYMMETRY (Full Auto MCACC, 2 Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the Use this to display the level of the various chan-
we recommend using the 30-50ms setting.
etc.), the graph for the inferred reverb Home Menu. nels. See Channel Level on page 70 for more
Use k/l to select the setting. Use i/j to
characteristics can be displayed by 3 Select the setting you want to check. on this.
switch between them.
selecting Reverb View. To display the Select the setting from the following time ! Speaker Setting – Used to check the 1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the
actually measured reverb characteristics periods (in milliseconds): 0-20ms, 10-30ms, settings of the speaker systems. See Speaker MCACC Data Check menu.
after EQ calibration, measure with 20-40ms, 30-50ms, 40-60ms, 50-70ms and Setting on page 66 for more on this. 2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use
EQ ON. 60-80ms. This setting will be applied to all ! Channel Level – Used to check the output k/l to select the MCACC preset you
When the reverb measurement is finished, channels during calibration. level of the different speakers. See Channel want to check.
you can select Reverb View to see the results When you’re finished, select START. It will take Level on page 66 for more on this. The level of the various channels set at the
on-screen. See Professional Calibration EQ about 2 to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish. ! Speaker Distance – Used to check the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is
graphical output on page 79 for troubleshooting After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is distance to the different speakers. See displayed for channels that are not connected.
information. set, you are given the option to check the set- Speaker Distance on page 66 for more on this.
4 If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can tings on-screen. ! Standing Wave – Used to check the
standing wave control filter settings. See Speaker Distance
check the reverb characteristics for each
channel. Press RETURN when you’re done. Standing Wave on page 67 for more on this. Use this to display the distance from the dif-
The reverb characteristics are dis- ! Acoustic Cal EQ – Used to check ferent channels to the listening position. See
played when the Full Auto MCACC or the calibration values of the listening Speaker Distance on page 70 for more on this.
Reverb Measurement measurements are environment’s frequency response. See 1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the
conducted. Acoustic Cal EQ on page 67 for more on this. MCACC Data Check menu.
Use k/l to select the channel, frequency ! Group Delay (VSX-53 only) – Used to check
the speakers’ group delay (both before and
2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use
and calibration setting you want to check. Use
after calibration). See Group Delay on page k/l to select the MCACC preset you
i/j to go back and forth between the three.
67 for more on this. want to check.
The reverb characteristics graph before and
The distance from the various channels set at
after EQ calibration can be displayed by select- 4 Press RETURN to go back to the the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is
ing Calibration : Before / After. Note that the MCACC Data Check menu, repeating steps displayed for channels that are not connected.
2 and 3 to check other settings.

66 En


Standing Wave Group Delay Data Management Renaming MCACC presets
Use this to display the standing wave related VSX-53 only This system allows you to store up to six If you have several different MCACC presets
adjustment values for the various MCACC Use this to display the calibrated speaker group MCACC presets, allowing you to calibrate your that you’re using, you may want to rename
memories. See Standing Wave on page 64 for delay results. See Better sound using Phase system for different listening positions (or them for easier identification.
more on this. Control and Full Band Phase Control on page 39 frequency adjustments for the same listening 1 Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the
1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the for more on this. position). This is useful for alternate settings Data Management setup menu.
MCACC Data Check menu. 1 Select ‘Group Delay’ from the to match the kind of source you’re listening to 2 Select the MCACC preset you want to
2 When ‘Filter Channel’ is highlighted, MCACC Data Check menu. and where you’re sitting (for example, watching rename, then select an appropriate preset
use i/j to select the channel for which movies from a sofa, or playing a video game name.
2 When ‘Channel’ is highlighted, use close to the TV).
you want to check standing wave control. k/l to select the channel you want to Use i/j to select the preset, then k/l to
The standing wave related calibration value From this menu you can copy from one preset select a preset name.
check. to another, name presets for easier identifica-
for the selected channel stored at the selected The result of group delay calibration for the 3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets
MCACC preset and its graph are displayed. tion and clear any ones you don’t need.
selected channel is displayed. ! This can be done in Automatically conducting as necessary, then press RETURN when
3 Press k to highlight ‘MCACC’, then When measurements have been per- optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on you’re finished.
use i/j to select the MCACC preset you formed with Full Auto MCACC selected page 26 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page You will return to the Data Management setup
want to check. at Advanced MCACC or with ALL or 62 , either of which you should have already menu.
Full Band Phase Ctrl selected when completed.
Acoustic Cal EQ Auto MCACC is selected, the graph before Copying MCACC preset data
group delay calibration is also displayed. 1 Press on the remote control,
Use this to display the calibration values for the When After is selected at Calibration, the then press HOME MENU. If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic
frequency response of the various channels set group delay after calibration is displayed. A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on
in the different MCACC presets. See Acoustic Compared to when Before is selected, with appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and page 64 ), we recommend copying your current
Calibration EQ Adjust on page 65 for more on After there is less difference in the delay ENTER to navigate through the screens and settings to an unused MCACC preset. Instead
this. between frequency bands and the group delay select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the of just a flat EQ curve, this will give you a refer-
1 Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ from the between the different channels is uniform, current menu. ence point from which to start.
MCACC Data Check menu. allowing you to check the full band phase con- 2 Select ‘Data Management’ from the ! The settings made in Automatically conducting
trol effect. Home Menu. optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on
2 When ‘Ch’ is highlighted, use i/j to page 26 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page
select the channel. No Data is displayed if the selected group delay 3 Select the setting you want to adjust.
has not been measured. 62 .
The calibration value for the frequency response ! Memory Rename – Name your MCACC
of the selected channel stored at the selected presets for easy identification (see Renaming 1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the
MCACC preset and its graph are displayed. MCACC presets on page 67 ). Data Management setup menu.

3 Press k to highlight ‘MCACC’, then ! MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings from 2 Select the setting you want to copy.
use i/j to select the MCACC preset you one MCACC preset to another (see Copying ! All Data – Copies all the settings of the
MCACC preset data on page 67 ). selected MCACC preset memory.
want to check.
! MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC ! Level & Distance – Copies only the channel
presets that you don’t want (see Clearing level and speaker distance settings of the
MCACC presets on page 68 ). selected MCACC preset memory.

En 67


3 Select the MCACC preset you’ll be
copying the settings ‘From’, then specify
where you want to copy them (‘To’).
Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC
preset you’re currently using (this can’t be
undone).
4 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and copy the
settings.
When MCACC Memory Copy? is displayed,
select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not
copied.
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to
confirm the MCACC preset has been cop-
ied, then you automatically return to the
Data Management setup menu.

Clearing MCACC presets
If you are no longer using one of the MCACC
presets stored in memory, you can choose to
clear the calibration settings of that preset.
1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the
2 Select the MCACC preset you want to
clear.
Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset
you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).
3 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and clear the
preset.
When MCACC Memory Clear? is displayed,
select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not
cleared.
Completed! shows in the GUI screen
to confirm the MCACC preset has been
cleared, then you automatically return to the

68 En

The System Setup and Other Setup menus 12

The System Setup and Other Setup ! Speaker System – Specifies how you are
using your surround back speaker terminals
! Speaker B – Select to use the B speaker
terminals to listen to stereo playback in
and B speaker terminals (page 69). another room (see Switching the speaker
menus ! Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and
number of speakers you’ve connected (page
terminals on page 53 ).
! Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re
69). bi-amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping
! Network Setup – Conducts the setup ! Channel Level – Adjusts the overall balance your speakers on page 15 ).
Making receiver settings from necessary to connect this unit to the network of your speaker system (page 70). ! ZONE 2 – Select to use the surround back
the System Setup menu (see Network Setup menu on page 71 ). ! Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance speaker terminals for an independent system
The following section describes how to change ! HDMI Setup – Synchronizes this receiver of your speakers from the listening position in another zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE
the speaker-related settings manually and make with your Pioneer component supporting (page 70). controls on page 53 ).
various other settings (input selection, OSD Control with HDMI (page 47). ! X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of your 3 If you selected Normal(SB/FH),
language selection, etc.). ! Other Setup – Makes customized settings speaker system for movie soundtracks (page Normal(SB/FW), or Speaker B in Step 2,
to reflect how you are using the receiver (see 71).
1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the select the placement of the surround
The Other Setup menu on page 73 ). ! THX Audio Setting – Specifies whether you
receiver and your TV. speakers.
Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this are using a THX speaker setup (page 71).
In a 7.1-channel surround system with sur-
receiver. 3 Make the adjustments necessary for round speakers placed directly at the sides of
Manual speaker setup each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm
2 Press on the remote control, the listening position, the surround sound of
This receiver allows you to make detailed set- after each screen. 5.1-channel sources is heard from the side.
tings to optimize the surround sound perfor- This function mixes the sound of the surround
mance. You only need to make these settings speakers with the surround back speakers so
appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and Speaker system setting
once (unless you change the placement of your that the surround sound is heard from diago-
ENTER to navigate through the screens and ! Default setting: Normal(SB/FH)
current speaker system or add new speakers). nally to the rear as it should be.
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the There are several ways you can use the speaker
These settings are designed to customize your Depending on the positions of the speakers and
current menu. terminals with this receiver. In addition to a
system, but if you’re satisfied with the settings the sound source, in some cases it may not be
! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the normal home theater setup where they are
made in Automatically conducting optimum possible to achieve good results. In this case,
Home Menu. used for the front height speakers or front wide
sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 26 , it set the setting to ON SIDE or IN REAR.
3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the isn’t necessary to make all of these settings. speakers, they can be used for bi-amping the
! ON SIDE – Select when the surround
Home Menu, then press ENTER. front speakers or as an independent speaker
speakers is positioned right beside you.
4 Select the setting you want to adjust. system in another room.
CAUTION ! IN REAR – Select when the surround speaker
! Manual SP Setup – Sets the type of ! The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup 1 Select ‘Speaker System’ from the is positioned obliquely behind you.
connection used for surround back terminals are output at high volume. Manual SP Setup menu.
4 When ‘Setting Change?’ is displayed,
and the size, number distance and overall See Making receiver settings from the System
1 Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press select Yes.
balance of the connected speakers (see Setup menu on page 69 if you’re not already at
ENTER. If No is selected, the setting is not changed.
Manual speaker setup on page 69 ). this screen.
See Making receiver settings from the System You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
! Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve 2 Select the speaker system setting.
Setup menu on page 69 if you’re not already at
connected to the digital, HDMI and ! Normal(SB/FH) – Select for normal home
this screen. Speaker Setting
component video inputs (see The Input Setup theater use with front height speakers in your
menu on page 28 ). 2 Select the setting you want to adjust. Use this setting to specify your speaker configu-
main (speaker system A) setup.
! OSD Language – The GUI screen’s display If you are doing this for the first time, you may ration (size, number of speakers and crossover
! Normal(SB/FW) – Select for normal home
language can be changed (see Changing the want to adjust these settings in order: frequency). It is a good idea to make sure that
theater use with front wide speakers in your
OSD display language (OSD Language) on main (speaker system A) setup. the settings made in Automatically conduct-
page 26 ). ing optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC)

En 69

12 The System Setup and Other Setup menus

on page 26 are correct. Note that this setting — You can adjust this setting only the best bass results. Depending on the 4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be when Speaker System setting is speaker placement of your room you You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
set independently. Normal(SB/FW). may actually experience a decrease in
! If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all — If the surround speakers are set to NO, the amount of bass due low frequency Channel Level
speakers to SMALL. this setting will automatically be set to cancellations. In this case, try changing
the position or direction of speakers. If Using the channel level settings, you can adjust
1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the NO.
the overall balance of your speaker system, an
Manual SP Setup menu. ! Surr – Select LARGE if your surround you can’t get good results, listen to the
bass response with it set to PLUS and important factor when setting up a home the-
speakers reproduce bass frequencies
2 Choose the set of speakers that you YES or the front speakers set to LARGE ater system.
effectively. Select SMALL to send bass
want to set, then select a speaker size. frequencies to the other speakers or and SMALL alternatively and let your ears 1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the
Use k/l to select the size (and number) of subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround judge which sounds best. If you’re having Manual SP Setup menu.
each of the following speakers: speakers choose NO (the sound of the problems, the easiest option is to route The test tones will start.
! Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers surround channels is sent to the front all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by
reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or
2 Adjust the level of each channel using
speakers or a subwoofer). selecting SMALL for the front speakers. k/l.
if you didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select ! SB – Select the number of surround back If you select NO for the subwoofer the front
SMALL to send the bass frequencies to the Use i/j to switch speakers.
speakers you have (one, two or none). Select speakers will automatically be fixed to LARGE. Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone
subwoofer. LARGEx2 or LARGEx1 if your surround Also, the center, surround, surround back, front
! Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker is emitted.
back speakers reproduce bass frequencies height and front wide speakers can’t be set to ! If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL)
reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or effectively. Select SMALLx2 or SMALLx1 to LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL.
select SMALL to send bass frequencies to meter, take the readings from your main
send bass frequencies to the other speakers In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the listening position and adjust the level of each
the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround subwoofer.
connect a center speaker, choose NO (the speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow
back speakers choose NO. 3 Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover reading).
center channel is sent to the front speakers). — If you selected ZONE 2 or Front Bi-Amp
! FH – Select LARGE if your front height frequency. 3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
(in Speaker system setting on page 69 Frequencies below this point will be sent to the
speakers reproduce bass frequencies ) you can’t adjust the surround back You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
effectively, or select SMALL to send bass subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).
settings. ! This setting decides the cutoff between bass
frequencies to the other speakers or — If the surround speakers are set to Note
subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front height sounds playing back from the speakers
NO, the surround back speakers will selected as LARGE, or the subwoofer, ! You can change the channel levels by press
speakers, choose NO (the front height automatically be set to NO. to the receiver operation mode, then
channel is sent to the front speakers). and bass sounds playing back from those
! SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of selected as SMALL. It also decides where press CH LEVEL, and then using k/l on the
— You can adjust this setting only channels set to SMALL are output from the remote control.
when Speaker System setting is the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE
subwoofer when YES is selected. Choose the channel.
Normal(SB/FH). PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to
— If the surround speakers are set to NO, ! With Full Auto MCACC setup Speaker Distance
output bass sound continuously or you want or Auto MCACC setup (ALL or
this setting will automatically be set to For good sound depth and separation from
deeper bass (the bass frequencies that would Speaker Setting), the setting here will not
NO. your system, you need to specify the distance of
normally come out the front and center apply and the crossover frequency will be
! FW – Select LARGE if your front wide your speakers from the listening position. The
speakers are also routed to the subwoofer). If automatically set. Crossover frequency is a
speakers reproduce bass frequencies receiver can then add the proper delay needed
you did not connect a subwoofer choose NO frequency aimed at achieving the optimal
effectively, or select SMALL to send bass for effective surround sound.
(the bass frequencies are output from other sound field taking into account the bass
frequencies to the other speakers or speakers). 1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the
subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front wide capacity of all connected speakers and
— If you have a subwoofer and like lots of human aural characteristics.
Manual SP Setup menu.
speakers, choose NO (the front wide channel bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE
is sent to the front speakers). ! If you’re using THX speakers, confirm that
for your front speakers and PLUS for the the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz.
subwoofer. This may not, however, yield
70 En


2 Adjust the distance of each speaker a built-in DHCP server function), simply turn on
THX Audio Setting Network Setup menu
using k/l. the DHCP server function, and you will not need
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in This menu allows the user to adjust various THX Make the settings for connecting the receiver to to set up the network manually. You must set up
1/2 inch Increments. features including Loudness Plus, SBch pro- the Internet and using the network functions. the network as described below only when you
cessing, THX Select2 Subwoofer (on/off), and have connected this receiver to a broadband
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN. 1 Press on the remote control,
Boundary Gain Control. Please see page 88 for router without a DHCP server function. Before
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu. then press HOME MENU.
details regarding these THX features. you set up the network, consult with your ISP or
1 Select ‘THX Audio Setting’ from the the network manager for the required settings.
Note appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and
Manual SP Setup menu. It is advised that you also refer to the operation
! For best surround sound, make sure the ENTER to navigate through the screens and
manual supplied with your network component.
surround back speakers are the same 2 Select either ON or OFF for the THX select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
! In case you make changes to the network
distance from the listening position. Loudness Plus setting. current menu.
configuration without the DHCP server
3 Specify whether the SBch Processing is 2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the function, make the corresponding changes to
X-Curve AUTO or MANUAL. Home Menu. the network settings of this receiver.
! AUTO – When surround back speakers are 3 Select ‘Network Setup’ from the
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too
bright when played back in large rooms. The
connected, Dolby Digital EX signal is present System Setup menu. IP Address
in the audio signals being input is detected The IP address to be entered must be defined
X-Curve setting acts as a kind of re-equalization 4 Select the setting you want to adjust.
and the appropriate THX surround mode is within the following ranges. If the IP address
for home theater listening, and restores proper If you are doing this for the first time, you may
set. defined is beyond the following ranges, you
tonal balance of movie soundtracks. want to adjust these settings in order:
! MANUAL – The desired THX surround mode cannot play back audio files stored on compo-
Since the principal is the same, X-Curve isn’t ! IP Address, Proxy – Sets up the IP address/
can be selected regardless of whether or not nents on the network or listen to Internet radio
applied when you’re using any of the Home Proxy of this receiver (page 71).
surround back channel signals are present in stations.
THX, Pure direct or Optimum surround modes. ! Network Standby – Allows the AVNavigator
the audio signals being input. Class A: 10.0.0.1 to 10.255.255.254
1 Select ‘X-Curve’ from the or iControlAV2 function to be used even
4 Specify whether your subwoofer is when the receiver is in the standby mode Class B: 172.16.0.1 to 172.31.255.254
Manual SP Setup menu.
Select2 certified or not. (page 72). Class C: 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.255.254
2 Choose the X-Curve setting you want. If your subwoofer isn’t THX Select2 certified, but ! Friendly Name – The name of the receiver
Use k/l to adjust the setting. The X-Curve you still want to switch boundary gain compen- Subnet Mask
displayed on a computer or other device
is expressed as a downwards slope in deci- sation on, select YES here, but the effect might connected to the network can be changed In case an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter
bels per octave, starting at 2 kHz. The sound not work properly. (page 72). is directly connected to this receiver, enter the
becomes less bright as the slope increases (to
5 Select either ON or OFF for Boundary ! Parental Lock – Restricts usage of network subnet mask provided by your ISP on paper. In
a maximum of –3.0dB/oct). Use the following
Gain Compensation setting. functions (page 72). most cases, enter 255.255.255.0.
guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your
6 When you’re finished, press RETURN. ! Port Number Setting – Sets the numbers of
room size:
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu. the ports where signals from IP Control are Default Gateway
Room size (ft 2) ≤400 ≤550 ≤650 ≤800 ≤2200 ≤12000 received (page 72). In case a gateway (router) is connected to this
X-Curve ! Wireless LAN Converter – Used to make the receiver, enter the corresponding IP address.
–0.5 –1.0 –1.5 –2.0 –2.5 –3.0
(dB/oct) wireless LAN converter’s access point and IP
address settings (page 72). Primary DNS Server/
! If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be For the wireless LAN converter, use the Secondary DNS Server
flat and the X-Curve has no effect. separately sold AS-WL300.
In case there is only one DNS server address
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN. provided by your ISP on paper, enter it in the
IP address/Proxy setting ‘Primary DNS Server’ field. In case there are
In case the router connected to the LAN termi- more than two DNS server addresses, enter
nal on this receiver is a broadband router (with
En 71


‘Secondary DNS Server’ in the other DNS 6 Enter the port number of your proxy ! Upon shipment from the factory, the password
server address field. server. is set to “0000”. Note
Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the ! When the wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300)
Proxy Hostname/Proxy Port position, and ENTER to confirm your selection. is connected, the port number cannot be set
Important
This setting is required when you connect 7 Select ‘OK’ to confirm the IP Address/ When the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input is to port 3.
this receiver to the Internet via a proxy server. Proxy setup. selected, the setting made here cannot be ! We recommend setting the port number to 23
Enter the IP address of your proxy server in the reflected. Set the input to something other than or within the range of 49152 to 65535.
‘Proxy Hostname’ field. Also, enter the port HOME MEDIA GALLERY before making this ! When the port number is changed, network
Network Standby communications between the receiver and
number of your proxy server in the ‘Proxy Port’ setting.
field. This setting allows the AVNavigator or iContro- AVNavigator are no longer possible. In this
lAV2 function for operating the receiver from a 1 Select ‘Parental Lock’ from the case, click Settings on the AVNavigator’s
1 Select ‘IP Address, Proxy’ from the computer connected on the same LAN as the Network Setup menu. function menu, select the IP Address tab
Network Setup menu. receiver to be used even when the receiver is in 2 Input the password. and input one of the port numbers set on the
2 Select the DHCP setting you want. the standby mode. Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the receiver side to enable communications with
When you select ON, the network is automati- 1 Select ‘Network Standby’ from the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection. AVNavigator.
cally set up, and you do not need to follow Steps
Network Setup menu. 3 Specify whether to turn Parental Lock
3. Proceed with Step 4.
2 Specify whether the Network Standby on or off. Wireless LAN Converter
If there is no DHCP server on the network and
is ON or OFF. ! OFF – Internet services are not restricted. This setting is required for connecting a wire-
you select ON, this receiver will use its own
! ON – The AVNavigator or iControlAV2 ! ON – Internet services are restricted. less LAN converter to the receiver and using
Auto IP function to determine the IP address.
! The IP address determined by the Auto IP function can be used even when the receiver 4 If you want to change the password, wireless network functions.
function is 169.254.X.X. You cannot listen to is in the standby mode. select Change Password. For the wireless LAN converter, use the sepa-
an Internet radio station if the IP address is ! OFF – The AVNavigator or iControlAV2 In this case, the procedure returns to step 2. rately sold AS-WL300.
set for the Auto IP function. function cannot be used when the receiver
is in the standby mode (This lets you reduce
Port Number Setting Access Point Setting
3 Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask,
power consumption in the standby mode). Make the connection settings for the wireless
Default Gateway, Primary DNS Server and On this receiver, there can be up to 5 numbers
Secondary DNS Server. LAN converter connected to the receiver and
of ports where signals are received. One of
Press i/j to select a number and k/l to Friendly Name these, port 8102 which used for communicating
the access point. Connect the wireless LAN
move the cursor. converter to the receiver and set DHCP on the
1 Select ‘Friendly Name’ from the with iControlAV2, cannot be changed, but the
“IP Address, Proxy” settings menu beforehand
4 Select ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’ for the Network Setup menu. desired number can be set for the 4 other ports.
(page 71). There are four way to make the set-
Enable Proxy Server setting to deactivate 2 Select ‘Edit Name’ then select 1 Select ‘Port Number Setting’ from the tings for connecting to the access point, as
or activate the proxy server. ‘Rename’. Network Setup menu. shown below.
In case you select ‘OFF’, proceed with Step 7. In If after changing the name you want to restore 2 Select the port number you want to ! WPS (PBC) – Connection settings are made
case you select ‘ON’, on the other hand, pro- the name to the default, select Default. automatically simply by pressing the WPS
change.
ceed with Step 5. buttons on the access point and wireless LAN
3 Input the name you want. 3 Input the port number.
5 Enter the address of your proxy server Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the ! Use i/j to select a character, k/l to
converter, following the instructions displayed
or the domain name. position, and ENTER to confirm your selection. on the receiver’s screen. This is the simplest
set the position, and ENTER to confirm your
Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the way of making the settings, and is possible
selection.
position, and ENTER to confirm your selection. when the access point and wireless LAN
Parental Lock ! It is not possible to set the same port number
converter are equipped with WPS buttons.
more than once.
Set restrictions for using Internet services. Also Network connection settings require
set the password accompanying the usage 4 If there are other port numbers you approximately 2 minutes from the time the
restrictions. want to change, repeat steps 2 and 3.

72 En


WPS buttons are pressed. Wait until the In this case, use this setting to set an IP
settings are completed. address specific to the wireless LAN converter. The Other Setup menu Auto Power Down
! WPS (PIN) – Display a list of the SSIDs of The Other Setup menu is where you can make The power can be set to turn off automatically if
1 Select ‘Wireless LAN Converter’ from
connectable access points and select the customized settings to reflect how you are no operation has been performed for a specific
the Network Setup menu.
access point to which you want to connect using the receiver. amount of time with no audio or video signals
from this list. Connection settings are made by 2 Make the wireless LAN converter being input to the receiver. When using ZONE
settings as necessary. 1 Press on the remote control, 2 or ZONE 3, the ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 power can
inputting the 8-digit PIN code displayed on the
When making the connection settings of the then press HOME MENU. also be set to turn off, but for ZONE 2 or ZONE
receiver’s screen to the access point to which
wireless LAN converter and access point, select A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen 3 the power turns off automatically after the
you want to connect.
“Access Point Setting” and make the connec- appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and amount of time set here even if signals are
! Search for Access Point – Display a list of
tion settings for the wireless LAN converter and ENTER to navigate through the screens and being input or operations have been performed.
the SSIDs of connectable access points and
access point following the instructions on the select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the Different times can be set for the main zone,
select the access point to which you want to
screen. current menu. ZONE 2 and ZONE 3.
connect from this list. Connection settings
with the access point are made by setting the If you want to set the wireless LAN converter’s 2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the
access point’s security protocol, security key IP address, select “WLAN IP Address” and Home Menu.
input the IP address.
Important
and WEP default key (only when the access 3 Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER. The explanations for ZONE 3 only apply to the
point’s security protocol is WEP). VSX-53.
4 Select the setting you want to adjust.
! Manual Setting – Connection settings are
made by manually inputting the SSID, security Checking the Network If you are doing this for the first time, you may 1 Select ‘Auto Power Down’ from the
Information want to adjust these settings in order: Other Setup menu.
protocol, security key and WEP default key
! Auto Power Down – Sets the power to turn
of the access point to which you want to The setting status of the following network- 2 Select the zone you want to set and set
off automatically when the receiver is not
connect. related items can be checked. the time after which the power turns off.
being used.
! IP Address – Check the IP address of this ! MAIN – The time can be selected from
! Volume Setup – Sets up the volume-related
receiver. among “15 min”, “30 min”, “60 min” and
Note operations of this receiver (page 74).
! MAC Address – Check the MAC address of “OFF”. The power turns off after there has
! If there is a “; ” (semicolon) in the access ! Remote Control Mode Setup – Sets this
this receiver. been no signal and no operation for the
point’s SSID or security key, wireless LAN receiver’s remote control mode (page 74).
! Friendly Name – Friendly Name on page 72 . selected time.
connection will not be possible even after ! Flicker Reduction Setup – Adjusts the way
! SSID – Check the SSID of the access point ! ZONE 2 – The time can be selected from
the wireless LAN converter settings are the GUI screen looks (page 74).
connected with the wireless LAN converter among “30 min”, “1 hour”, “3 hours”,
completed. Change the setting of the access ! EXTENSION Setup – Allows the CU-RF100
(only when a wireless LAN converter is “6 hours”, “9 hours” and “OFF”. The power
point’s SSID or security key to a character to be used even when the receiver is in the
connected). turns off after the selected time.
string that does not include a “; ” (semicolon). standby mode (page 74).
! ZONE 3 – The time can be selected from
! If it is not possible to connect to the access 1 Press on the remote control, ! Software Update – Use to update the
among “30 min”, “1 hour”, “3 hours”,
point with the WPS (PBC) or WPS (PIN) then press HOME MENU. receiver’s software and check the version.
“6 hours”, “9 hours” and “OFF”. The power
connection settings, we recommend A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen ! Pairing Bluetooth Setup – Use to pair a
turns off after the selected time.
making the connection settings at appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless
Search for Access Point or Manual Setting. ENTER to navigate through the screens and technology device (page 35).
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the Note
5 Make the adjustments necessary for
WLAN IP Address current menu. ! Depending on the connected devices, the
each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm
If the IP address of a device connected in the Auto Power Down function may not work
2 Select ‘Network Information’ from the after each screen.
LAN other than the wireless LAN converter is properly due to excessive noise or other
Home Menu.
set to “192.168.XXX.249”, the IP address of the reasons.
Display the setting status of the network-related
wireless LAN converter will be redundant, mak- items.
ing connection to the access point impossible.

En 73


1 Select ‘EXTENSION Setup’ from the
Volume Setup Remote Control Mode Setup
Other Setup menu. Important
You can set the maximum volume of this ! Default setting: 1 ! DO NOT unplug the power cord during
2 Select the EXTENSION setting you
receiver or specify what the volume level will be This sets this receiver’s remote control mode updating.
want.
when the power is turned on. to prevent erroneous operation when multiple ! When updating via the Internet, do not
units of the receiver are being used. 3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
1 Select ‘Volume Setup’ from the disconnect the LAN cable. When updating via
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
Other Setup menu. 1 Select ‘Remote Control Mode Setup’ a USB memory device, do not disconnect the
2 Select the Power ON Level setting you from the Other Setup menu. USB memory device.
Software Update
want. 2 Select the Remote Control Mode 1 Select ‘Software Update’ from the
The volume can be set so that it is always set setting you want. Use this procedure to update the receiver’s Other Setup menu.
to the same level when the receiver’s power is software and check the version. There are two
3 Select ‘OK’ to change the remote 2 Select the update procedure.
turned on. ways to update: via the Internet and via a USB
control mode. ! Update via Internet – The receiver checks
! LAST (default) – When the power is turned memory device.
whether updatable software is available via
on, the volume is set to the same level as 4 Follow the instructions on the screen Updating via the Internet is performed by
the Internet.
when the power was last turned off. to change the remote control’s setting. accessing the file server from the receiver and
! Update via USB Memory – The receiver
! “---” – When the power is turned on, the See Operating multiple receivers on page 56 . downloading the file. This procedure is only pos-
checks whether the USB memory device
volume is set to minimum level. 5 When you’re finished, press RETURN. sible if the receiver is connected to the Internet.
inserted into the USB port on the receiver’s
! –80.0dB to +12.0dB – Specify the volume to You will return to the Other Setup menu. Updating via a USB memory device is per-
front panel contains updatable software.
be set when the power is turned on, in steps formed by downloading the update file from a
“Accessing” is displayed and the update file
of 0.5 dB. computer, reading this file onto a USB memory
Flicker Reduction Setup device then inserting this USB memory device
is checked. Wait a while.
It is not possible to set a volume level greater
! Default setting: OFF into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel. 3 Check on the screen whether or not an
than the value specified at Volume Limit setup
(see below).
The GUI screen’s resolution can be increased. With this procedure, the USB memory device update file was found.
If you feel the GUI screen is hard to see, try containing the update file must first be inserted If “New version found.” is displayed, the
3 Select the Volume Limit setting you changing this setting. Note that the resolution update file has been found. The version number
into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel.
want. in this setting only affects the GUI screen; it has ! If an update file is provided on the Pioneer and updating time are displayed.
Use this function to limit the maximum volume. no influence on the video output. If “This is the latest version. There is no need
website, download it onto your computer.
The volume cannot be increased above the level to update.” is displayed, no update file has
1 Select ‘Flicker Reduction Setup’ from When downloading an update file from the
set here, even by operating MASTER VOLUME been found.
the Other Setup menu. Pioneer website onto your computer, the file
button (or the dial on the front panel).
will be in ZIP format. Unzip the ZIP file before 4 To update, select OK.
! OFF (default) – The maximum volume is not 2 Select the Flicker Reduction setting you
saving it on the USB memory device. If there The updating screen appears and updating is
limited. want.
are any old downloaded files or downloaded performed.
! –20.0dB/–10.0dB/0.0dB – The maximum 3 When you’re finished, press RETURN. files for other models on the USB memory ! The power turns off automatically once
volume is limited to the value set here. You will return to the Other Setup menu. device, delete them. updating is completed.
4 Select the Mute Level setting you
want. EXTENSION Setup
This sets how much the volume is to be turned
! Default setting: OFF
down when MUTE is pressed.
A separately sold the CU-RF100 can be used to
! FULL (default) – No sound.
operate the receiver by RF communications. To
! –40.0dB/–20.0dB – The volume will be
do so, set the EXTENSION setting to ON. When
turned down to the level specified here.
ON is set here, the receiver can be operated
5 When you’re finished, press RETURN. even when the receiver is in the standby mode.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.

74 En


Software Update messages

Status
Descriptions
messages
No update file was found on the
NO UPDATE USB memory device. Store the file
FILE in the USB memory device’s root
directory.
Try disconnecting then reconnecting
the USB device or storing the update
FILE ERROR file again. If the error still occurs,
try using a different USB memory
device.
UPDATE
Turn the receiver’s power off, then
ERROR 1
turn it back on and try updating the
to UPDATE
software again.
ERROR 7
If this message flashes, updating
has failed. Update via a USB mem-
ory device. Put the update file on a
Update via
USB memory device and connect
USB
the device to the USB port. When
the file is found, software updating
starts automatically.
UE11 Updating has failed. Use the same
UE22 procedure to update the software
UE33 again.

En 75

13 Additional information

Additional information Symptom
AMP ERR blinks in the dis-
Remedy
The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver
play, then the power auto- on. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized indepen-
matically switches off. The dent service company.
Troubleshooting 1 ADVANCED MCACC blinks and
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is the power does not turn on.
something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in AMP OVERHEAT blinks in the Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back
another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the display and the FL OFF indicator on (see Installing the receiver on page 6 ).
trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer flash and the power turns off. Wait at least 1 minute, then try turning the power on again.
authorized independent service company to carry out repair work. The temperature within the unit has exceeded the allowablevalue.
! If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the
Lower the volume level.
power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
The receiver suddenly power off The power unit is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a
If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting below, if the screen freezes unexpectedly or if
or ADVANCED MCACC flashes. Pioneer authorized independent service company.
the buttons on the remote control or front panel stop working completely, do the following:
Display blinks 12V TRG ERR. An error has arisen in the 12 V trigger jacks. Reconnect accurately then turn
! Press u STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn off the power, then turn the power back on.
the power back on.
! If the power cannot be turned off, press and hold u STANDBY/ON on the front panel for over 10
seconds. The power will turn off. (In this case, the various settings made on the receiver may be No sound
cleared.)
Symptom Remedy
Power
No sound is output when an Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press
Symptom Remedy input function is selected. SPEAKERS).
The power does not turn on. Make sure that the power cord is plugged in to an active power outlet. No sound is output from the Make sure the correct input function is selected.
front speakers.
Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in. Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.
Power cannot be turned off. Press the remote control’s ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 (VSX-53 only), then press u Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL).
(ZONE 2 ON or ZONE 3 ON (VSX- RECEIVER to switch the sub zone off. Note that when Fixed PCM ON is selected, you won’t be able to hear any other
53 only) is displayed.) signal format (see Setting the Audio options on page 50 ).
The receiver suddenly switches Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting your
off or the iPod iPhone iPad panel or another set of wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure equipment on page 11 ).
indicator blinks. there are no stray strands.
Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers
The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and on page 13 ).
call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.
No sound from the surround or Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance
During loud playback the power Turn down the volume. center speakers. mode isn’t selected; select one of the surround listening modes (see Enjoying
suddenly switches off. Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on various types of playback using the listening modes on page 37 ).
page 64 . Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Set-
Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down ENTER on the front ting on page 69 ).
panel, press u STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby mode. Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 70 ).
Use TUNE i/j to select D.SAFETY cOFFd, and then use PRESET k/l
Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 13 ).
to select 1 or 2 (select D.SAFETY cOFFd to deactivate this feature). If the
power switches off even with 2 switched on, turn down the volume. With 1
or 2 on, some features may be unavailable.
The unit does not respond when Try switching the receiver off, then back on again.
the buttons are pressed. Try disconnecting the power cord, then connect again.

76 En

Additional information 13

Symptom Remedy Symptom Remedy
No sound from surround back Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL, and the Sound is produced from Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input
speakers. surround speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 69 ). analog components, but not signal on page 39 ).
Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 13 ). If from digital ones (DVD, LD, Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the
only one surround back speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the CD, etc.). component is connected to (see The Input Setup menu on page 28 ).
left channel speaker terminal. Check the digital output settings on the source component.
Surround back speakers will not play while the Speaker System is set to If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not
Speaker B and audio is being played through speaker B. turned down.
When Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FH) or Normal(SB/FW) and SP: No sound is output or a noise Check that your BD or DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.
FH ON or SP: FW ON is selected with the SPEAKERS button, no sound will be is output when Dolby Digital/ Check the digital output settings or the HDMI audio output settings of your BD
output from the surround back speakers. Select SP: SB/FH ON, SP: SB/FW ON DTS software is played back. or DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set to On.
or SP: SB ON (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 53 ).
If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not
No sound from front height or Check that the front height or front wide speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL,
turned down.
front wide speakers. and the surround speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 69 ).
No sound when using the If the HDMI input function is selected, sound is muted until exiting the
When Speaker System is set to Normal(SB/FH) or Normal(SB/FW) and SP:
Home Menu. Home Menu.
SB ON is selected with the SPEAKERS button, no sound will be output from
the front height or front wide speakers. Select SP: SB/FH ON, SP: SB/FW ON,
Other audio problems
SP: FH ON or SP: FW ON (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 53 ).
Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 13 ). Symptom Remedy
No sound from subwoofer. Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume Speaker switching sound Depending on the listening mode, the front height (or front wide) and sur-
turned up. (clicking sound) is heard from round back speakers may switch automatically in function of changes in the
receiver during playback. input audio. A speaker switching sound (clicking sound) will be heard from
If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.
the receiver at this time. If this sound bothers you, we recommend to change
Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on the speaker terminal option (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 53 ).
page 69 ).
Broadcast stations cannot Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and
The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the be selected automatically, or secure to a wall, etc.
characteristics of your other speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 69 ). there is considerable noise in Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 21).
If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change radio broadcasts.
Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.
your speaker settings to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE /
Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 69 ). Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluo-
rescent light, motor, etc. Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the
Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or to a very quiet setting (see
AM antenna.
Setting the Audio options on page 50 ).
Noise is output when scanning This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player
Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 70 ).
a DTS CD. alters the digital information, making it unreadable, resulting in noise being
No sound from one speaker. Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 13 ). output. Lower the volume when scanning.
Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 70 ). When playing a DTS format LD Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input
Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page there is audible noise on the signal on page 39 ).
69 ). soundtrack.
The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced Can’t record audio. You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog
effect listening modes, you may be able to create the missing channel (see recording from an analog source.
Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes on page 37 ). For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.
Subwoofer output is very low. To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers
to SMALL (see Speaker Setting on page 69 ).

En 77


Symptom Remedy ADAPTER PORT terminal
Everything seems to be set The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker Symptom Remedy
up correctly, but the playback terminals on the receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on
The Bluetooth wireless Check that no object that emits electromagnetic waves in the 2.4 GHz band
sound is odd. the speakers (see Connecting the speakers on page 13 ).
technology device cannot be (microwave oven, wireless LAN device or Bluetooth wireless technology appa-
The Phase Control feature If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or connected or operated. Sound ratus) is near the unit. If such an object is near the unit, set the unit far from it.
doesn’t seem to have an the lowpass cutoff is set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE from the Bluetooth wireless Or, stop using the object emitting the electromagnetic waves.
audible effect. setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or depending on the subwoofer, the technology device is not emit- Check that the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not too far from the
setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound). ted or the sound is interrupted. unit and that obstructions are not set between the Bluetooth wireless technol-
Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker ogy device and the unit. Set the Bluetooth wireless technology device and the
Distance on page 70 ). unit so that the distance between them is less than about 10 m (33 ft.) and no
VSX-53 only: Full Band Phase Perform Full Auto MCACC measurements (see Automatically conducting opti- obstructions exist between them.
Control cannot be selected. mum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 26 ). Full Band Phase Control Check that the Bluetooth ADAPTER and the ADAPTER PORT of the unit are
automatically turns on once measurements are completed. correctly connected.
Noise or hum can be heard Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the The Bluetooth wireless technology device may not be set to the communica-
even when there is no sound same power source are not causing interference. tion mode supporting the Bluetooth wireless technology. Check the setting of
being input. the Bluetooth wireless technology device.
Can’t select some Input func- Check the Input Skip settings in the Input Setup menu (see The Input Setup Check that pairing is correct. The pairing setting was deleted from this unit or
tions by the INPUT SELECTOR menu on page 28 ). the Bluetooth wireless technology device. Reset the pairing.
on the front panel or the Check the HDMI Input assignment in the Input Setup menu then try OFF Check that the profile is correct. Use a Bluetooth wireless technology device
INPUT SELECT button on the (see The Input Setup menu on page 28 ). that supports A2DP profile and AVRCP profile.
remote control.
There seems to be a time lag See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on Video
between the speakers and the page 26 to set up your system again using MCACC (this will automatically
output of the subwoofer. compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output). Symptom Remedy
The maximum volume avail- Check that the Volume Limit is set to OFF (see Volume Setup on page 74 ). No image is output when an Check the video connections of the source component.
able (shown in the front panel input is selected. For HDMI, or when digital video conversion is set to OFF and a TV and another
display) is lower than the component are connected with different cords (in Setting the Video options on
+12dB maximum. page 52 ), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of
Certain listening modes or When Operation Mode is set to Basic, the Pioneer-recommended settings video cable as you used to connect your video component.
HOME MENU items cannot be are made and not all of the functions can be used. To use all of the functions Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using
selected. without restrictions, set Operation Mode to Expert (see Operation Mode component video or HDMI cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 28 ).
Setup on page 28 ). Check the video output settings of the source component.
Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.
Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not
be converted. If adjusting this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the
Video options on page 52 ) and/or the resolution settings on your component
or display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the
Video options on page 52 ) to OFF.
Can’t record video. Check that the source is not copy-protected.
The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the
same type of video cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the
video source (the one you want to record) to this receiver.

78 En


Noisy, intermittent, or dis- Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for After using the Auto MCACC There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-
torted picture. example), or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units, Setup, the speaker size setting conditioner, motor, etc. Switch off all other appliances in the room and use
for example). The picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your is incorrect. Auto MCACC Setup again.
display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and Depending on a number of factors (bass reproduction capabilities of the
display device using the same type of connection (component or composite), speakers, room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some cases.
then start playback again. Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker Setting on page 69 , and use
Video signals are not output When a monitor only compatible with resolutions of 480i is connected to the the ALL (Keep SP System) option for the Auto MCACC menu in Automatic
from the component terminal. component terminal and another monitor is connected to the HDMI terminal, MCACC (Expert) on page 62 if this is a recurring problem.
the video signals may not be output to the monitor connected to the compo- Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and nega-
nent terminal. If this happens, do the following: Distance setting properly. tive (–) terminals are matched up properly).
— Turn off the power of the monitor connected to the HDMI terminal.
The display shows KEY LOCK With the receiver in standby, press u STANDBY/ON for about 10 seconds
— Change the VIDEO PARAMETER menu RES setting (see Setting the Video
ON when you try to make while holding down SPEAKERS to disable the key lock.
options on page 52 ).
settings.
— Video signals from the HDMI terminal cannot be output to the component
terminals. Input the video signals from the player or other source to the com- Most recent settings have been The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.
posite or component terminals. When using the component terminal, assign it erased. Settings are only stored if all the zones are turned off. Turn off all the zones
at Input Setup (see The Input Setup menu on page 28 ). before unplugging the power cord.
The picture's movement is When Resolution under VIDEO PARAMETER is set to 1080/24p, the picture The various system settings Do not pull out the power cord while conducting the settings. (The settings
unnatural. may not be displayed properly for some source materials. In this case, set the are not stored. will be stored when both the main zone and sub zone turn off. Turn off all
resolution to something other than 1080/24p (page 52). zones before pulling out the power cord.)

Settings Certain listening modes or When Operation Mode is set to Basic, the Pioneer-recommended settings
HOME MENU items cannot be are made and not all of the functions can be used. To use all of the functions
Symptom Remedy selected. without restrictions, set Operation Mode to Expert (see Operation Mode
The Auto MCACC Setup con- The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room Setup on page 28 ).
tinually shows an error. as low as possible (see also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output
page 27 ). If the noise level cannot be kept low enough, you will have to set up
the surround sound manually (page 69). Symptom Remedy
When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND The reverb characteristics There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting
BACK L (Single) terminals. graph after EQ calibration does ALL CH ADJ in the Auto MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compen-
To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround not appear entirely flat. sate for room characteristics to achieve optimal sound.
channel, not the surround back channel. Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone. or no adjustment needed.
If Reverse Phase is displayed, try the following: The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and
— The speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker con- after measurements.
nections. EQ adjustments made using Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not
— Depending on the type of speakers and their installation conditions, the Manual MCACC setup display these adjustments in the reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibra-
Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected. do not appear to change the tion. However, these adjustments are taken into account by the filters dedi-
If this happens, select GO NEXT and continue. reverb characteristics graph cated to overall system calibration.
— If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when after EQ calibration.
using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers,
etc.), it may not be possible to properly identify the polarity.

En 79


Symptom Remedy Remote control
Lower frequency response Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not Symptom Remedy
curves do not seem to have change for speakers that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration,
Cannot be remote controlled. Set the remote control unit’s remote control mode so that it matches the set-
been calibrated for SMALL or do not output these frequencies.
ting on the main unit (see Operating multiple receivers on page 56 ).
speakers. Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations,
Check whether the receiver’s remote control mode is properly set (see Remote
no measurable sound is output for display.
Control Mode Setup on page 74 ).
Display Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on
page 6 ).
Symptom Remedy
Be sure to operate within 7 m (23 ft.) and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on
The display is dark or off. Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness. the front panel (see Operating range of remote control unit on page 7 ).
You can’t get DIGITAL to dis- Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote con-
play when using SIGNAL SEL. assigned correctly (see The Input Setup menu on page 28 ). trol.
2 DIGITAL or DTS does not These indicators do not light if playback is paused. Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the
light when playing Dolby/DTS Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source com- remote sensor.
software. ponent. Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jacks (see Operating other Pioneer
When playing Dolby Digital Check that the player is connected using a digital connection. components with this unit’s sensor on page 24 ).
or DTS sources, the receiver’s Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input Other components can’t be If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the
format indicators do not light. signal on page 39 ). operated with the system preset codes.
remote. The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset
Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are
converted to PCM. codes.
Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or When commands from the remote control units of other devices are regis-
DTS is selected. tered using the learning function, in some cases they may not be learned
properly. In this case, register the commands again using the learning func-
When playing certain discs, The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging
tion (see page 57). If they still do not work, they may be in a special format that
none of the receiver’s format for more on what audio tracks are recorded on the disc.
cannot be registered on this receiver’s remote control. Operate the device
indicators light.
using another remote control.
When playing a disc with the Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input
listening mode set to Auto Sur- signal on page 39 ). HDMI
round or ALC, 2 Pro Logic II If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround
or DTS Neo:6 appear on the Symptom Remedy
encoded), then this is not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details
receiver. about the audio tracks available. The HDMI indicator blinks Check all the points below.
continuously.
During playback of DVD- This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection.
Audio, the display shows PCM. This is not a malfunction.
The power turns off auto- See the Power section (page 76).
matically and some indicator
flashes, or some indicator
flashes and the power does not
turn on.

80 En


No picture or sound. This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are con- HDCP ERROR shows in the Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If
necting are also HDCP-compatible. If they are not, please connect them using display. it is not compatible with HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different
the component or composite video jacks. type of connection (component or composite). Some components that are
Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as
work with this receiver (even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.
using the component or composite video jacks between source and receiver. When Control with HDMI is Even when Control with HDMI is set to ON, the HDMI input is assigned for
If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to set to ON, the TV/SAT input’s the BD, DVD, DVR/BDR and VIDEO inputs regardless of the Control with
your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the HDMI Input assignment is HDMI setting, so use these terminals.
manufacturer for support. canceled.

If video images do not appear on your TV, try adjusting the resolution, Deep Synchronized operation not Check the HDMI connections.
Color or other setting for your component. possible using Control with The cable may be damaged.
HDMI function.
While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate con- Select ON for the Control with HDMI setting (see HDMI Setup on page 47 ).
nection for audio output. Select ALL for the Control Mode with HDMI setting (see HDMI Setup on page
To output signals in Deep Color, use an HDMI cable (High Speed HDMI® 47 ).
Cable) to connect this receiver to a component or TV with the Deep Color Turn the TV’s power on before turning on this receiver’s power.
feature.
Set the TV side Control with HDMI setting to on (see TV’s operating instruc-
No picture. Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 52 ). tions).
No sound, or sound suddenly Check that the HDMI Audio setting is set to AMP (Setting the Audio options VSX-53 only:
ceases. on page 50 ). Connect the TV to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal and set the HDMI output to
If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio. HDMI OUT 1. Then turn on first the TV’s power, then this receiver’s power.
If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection
for the audio.
Check the audio output settings of the source component.
HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to be rec-
ognized. Due to this, interruption in the audio may occur when switching
between audio formats or beginning playback.
Turning on/off the device connected to this unit’s HDMI OUT terminal during
playback, or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI cable during playback, may
cause noise or interrupted audio.
Noisy or distorted picture. Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for
example), or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units,
for example). The picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your
display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and
display device using the same type of connection (component or composite),
then start playback again.
If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to
your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the
manufacturer for support.

En 81


Symptom Causes Remedy
Troubleshooting 2
When the Wiring Navi, This is because of the browser’s This is not a problem. Perform the opera-
AVNavigator Interactive Manual, Glossary security function. tion to authorize the blocked contents.
or Software Update is
Symptom Causes Remedy launched, a warning about
AVNavigator does not interact The receiver’s power is not Turn the receiver’s power on. (Wait about security protection appears
well with the receiver. turned on. 60 seconds after the power turns on for on the browser.
network functions to start.) AVNavigator cannot be An error message may appear Re-start the PC, then start the installer
After this, press Detection in AVNavigator installed. if there are not enough system (AVNV_XXX_xxx.exe) with no other applica-
to redetect the receiver. resources available. tions active.
The receiver or computer is not Connect a LAN cable to the receiver or Installation of AVNavigator may Try the following, in the order indicated.
connected to the LAN. computer (page 22). fail because of incompatibilities 1. If there are any other applications active,
After this, press Detection in AVNavigator with other applications. exit the other applications and try starting
to redetect the receiver. the installer (AVNV_XXX_xxx.exe) again.
The router’s power is off. Turn the router’s power on. 2. If that does not work, try restarting your
After the router is fully started up, press PC, and starting the installer (AVNV_XXX_
Detection in AVNavigator to redetect the xxx.exe) with no other applications active.
receiver. Software updating does not There may be a problem with Contact your contracted provider.
AVNavigator’s network settings If your router does not support DHCP, operate well. your Internet Service Provider’s
are not correct. the receiver’s IP address must be set in network.
AVNavigator. First set the IP address on
the receiver, then set the same address in
USB interface
AVNavigator (page 71). Symptoms Causes Remedies
After this, press Detection in AVNavigator
to redetect the receiver. The folders/files stored on a The folders/files are currently Store the folders/files in the FAT region.
USB memory device are not stored in a region other than the
The receiver’s port number set- Click Settings on the AVNavigator’s func- displayed. FAT (File Allocation Table) region.
ting has been changed. tion menu, select the IP Address tab and
input the changed port number (one of the The number of levels in a folder is Limit the maximum number of levels in a
port numbers set on the receiver) (page 72). more than 8. folder to 8 (page 31).
After this, press Detection in AVNavigator There are more than 30 000 fold- Limit the maximum number of folders/files
to redetect the receiver. ers/files stored in a USB memory stored in a USB memory device to 30 000
Network connections could be Check the computer’s network settings, device. (page 31).
restricted due to the computer’s security settings, etc. The audio files are copyrighted. Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB
network settings, security set- After this, press Detection in AVNavigator memory device cannot be played back
tings, etc. to redetect the receiver. (page 31).
When the operating instructions Either refresh the page’s display using the
interactive mode is changed, the browser’s refresh button or display a differ-
settings may not be transferred ent page from the links so that the setting
to the browser, causing AVNavi- is transferred.
gator to stop interacting.

82 En


Symptoms Causes Remedies Symptoms Causes Remedies
A USB memory device is not The USB memory device does not Try using a USB memory device compatible Playback does not start while The component is currently Check whether the component is properly
recognized. support the mass storage class with the mass storage class specifications. “Connecting...” continues to disconnected from this receiver connected to this receiver or the power
specifications. Note that there are cases where even the be displayed. or the power supply. supply.
audio files stored on a USB memory device The PC or Internet radio is not The corresponding IP address is Switch on the built-in DHCP server function
compatible with the mass storage class properly operated. not properly set. of your router, or set up the network manu-
specifications are not played back on this ally according to your network environment
receiver (page 31). (page 71).
Connect the USB memory device and The IP address is being automati- The automatic configuration process takes
switch on this receiver (page 23). cally configured. time. Please wait.
A USB hub is currently being This receiver does not support USB hubs The audio files stored on Windows Media Player 11 or Install Windows Media Player 11 or
used. (page 31). components on the network, Windows Media Player 12 is not Windows Media Player 12 on your PC (page
This receiver recognizes the USB Switch off and on again this receiver. such as a PC, cannot be currently installed on your PC. 41).
memory device as a fraud. played back. Audio files were recorded in Play back audio files recorded in MP3,
A USB memory device is Some formats of USB memory Check whether the format of your USB formats other than MP3, WAV WAV (LPCM only), MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC, or
connected and displayed, but devices, including FAT 12, NTFS, memory device is either FAT 16 or FAT 32. (LPCM only), MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC, WMA. Note that some audio files recorded
the audio files stored on the and HFS, cannot be played back Note that the FAT 12, NTFS, and HFS for- and WMA. in these formats may not be played back on
USB memory device cannot on this receiver. mats cannot be played back on this receiver this receiver.
be played back. (page 31). Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 Audio files recorded in MPEG-4 AAC or
The file format cannot be properly See the list of file formats that can be AAC or FLAC are being played FLAC cannot be played back on Windows
played back on this receiver. played back on this receiver (page 32). back on Windows Media Player Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player
Cannot detect USB keyboard. The USB keyboard is routed This receiver is not compatible with USB 11 or Windows Media Player 12. 12. Try using another server. Refer to the
through a USB hub. hubs. Plug the keyboard directly into the operation manual supplied with your server.
receiver. The component connected to the Check whether the component is affected
A PS2 keyboard is routed through PS2 keyboards cannot be used with this network is not properly operated. by special circumstances or is in the sleep
a PS2/USB connector. receiver, even if routed through a PS2/USB mode.
connector. Use a USB keyboard. Try rebooting the component if necessary.

Keyboard is not a USB HID Class Some devices will not be detected. Use a The component connected to Try changing the settings for the compo-
device. USB HID Class keyboard. the network does not permit file nent connected to the network.
sharing.
Cannot enter correct text Keyboard is not US-international Use a US-international layout keyboard. NB:
using the USB keyboard. layout keyboard. Some characters cannot be entered. The folder stored on the compo- Check the folder stored on the component
nent connected to the network connected to the network.
HOME MEDIA GALLERY has been deleted or damaged.
Network connections could be Check the computer’s network settings,
Symptoms Causes Remedies restricted due to the computer’s security settings, etc.
Cannot access the network. The LAN cable is not firmly con- Firmly connect the LAN cable (page 22). network settings, security set-
nected. tings, etc.
The router is not switched on. Switch on the router. Cannot access the com- The component connected to the If the client is automatically authorized, you
Internet security software is cur- There are cases where a component with ponent connected to the network is not properly set. need to enter the corresponding informa-
rently installed in the connected Internet security software installed cannot network. tion again. Check whether the connection
component. be accessed. status is set to “Do not authorize”.
The audio component on the net- Switch on the audio component on the There are no playable audio files Check the audio files stored on the compo-
work which has been switched network before switching on this receiver. on the component connected to nent connected to the network.
off is switched on. the network.

En 83


Symptoms Causes Remedies Symptoms Causes Remedies
Audio playback is undesirably The audio file currently being Check whether the audio file was recorded Cannot listen to Internet radio The firewall settings for compo- Check the firewall settings for components
stopped or disturbed. played back was not recorded in a format supported by this receiver. stations. nents on the network are cur- on the network.
in a format playable on this Check whether the folder has been dam- rently in operation.
receiver. aged or corrupted. You are currently disconnected Check the connection settings for com-
Note that there are cases where even the from the Internet. ponents on the network, and consult with
audio files listed as playable on this receiver your network service provider if necessary
cannot be played back or displayed (page (page 71).
45).
The broadcasts from an Internet There are cases where you cannot listen
The LAN cable is currently dis- Connect the LAN cable properly (page 22). radio station are stopped or to some Internet radio stations even when
connected. interrupted. they are listed in the list of Internet radio
There is heavy traffic on the Use 100BASE-TX to access the components stations on this receiver (page 42).
network with the Internet being on the network. The Home Media Gallery can- The remote control is not cur- Press HMG to set the remote control to the
accessed on the same network. not be operated with the but- rently set to the Home Media Home Media Gallery mode (page 42).
When in the DMR mode, depend- In this case, adjust the volume from the tons on the remote control. Gallery mode.
ing on the external controller receiver or remote control.
being used, playback may be SIRIUS radio messages
interrupted when a volume
operation is performed from the
Status messages Causes Remedy
controller. Antenna Error The SIRIUS antenna is not prop- Check that the antenna cable is attached
erly connected. securely.
There is a connection routed There may be a shortage of bandwidth on
through a wireless LAN on the the 2.4 GHz band used by the wireless LAN. Check Sirius Tuner The SiriusConnectTM tuner is not Check that the 8 pin mini DIN cable and AC
same network. Make wired LAN connections not routed properly connected. Adapter are attached securely.
through a wireless LAN. Acquiring Signal The SIRIUS signal is too weak at Check for antenna obstructions and reposi-
Install away from any devices emitting the current location. tion the SIRIUS antenna to get better signal
electromagnetic waves on the 2.4 GHz band reception. Use the Antenna Aiming option
(microwave ovens, game consoles, etc.). If to optimize the antenna position.
this does not solve the problem, stop using Subscription Updating Unit is updating subscription. Wait until the encryption code has been
other devices that emit electromagnetic updated.
waves.
Updating Channels Unit is updating channels. Wait until the encryption code has been
Cannot access Windows In case of Windows Media Player Instead of logging onto the domain, log updated.
Media Player 11 or Windows 11: You are currently logged onto onto the local machine (page 42).
Invalid Channel Selected channel is not available/ Select another channel.
Media Player 12. the domain through your PC with
does not exist.
Windows XP or Windows Vista
installed. Firmware Updating The SiriusConnectTM tuner’s Wait for updating to finish.
In case of Windows Media Player firmware is being updated.
12: You are currently logged onto
the domain through your PC with
Windows 7 installed.

84 En


In the receiver’s IP settings, set DHCP to ON. After the setting is completed, turn the receiv-
Troubleshooting of wireless LAN er’s power off. Next, turn the receiver’s power back on and check whether the wireless LAN
converter’s settings can be displayed with the receiver.
Network cannot be accessed via wireless LAN. If the settings can be displayed, change the IP address settings of the receiver and wireless
Wireless LAN converter’s power is not on. (Wireless LAN converter’s “Power”, “WPS” and LAN converter as necessary.
“Wireless” indicators are not all lit.) The IP address settings of the receiver and wireless LAN converter do not match the settings of
! Check that the USB cable connecting the wireless LAN converter to the receiver’s DC the wireless LAN router, etc.
OUTPUT for WIRELESS LAN terminal is properly connected. ! Check the IP address settings of the receiver and wireless LAN converter (including the
WLAN POW ERR is displayed on the receiver’s display window. DHCP setting).
! There is a problem with the wireless LAN converter’s power supply. Turn the receiver’s If the receiver’s DHCP setting is “ON”, turn the receiver’s power off, then turn the power
power off, then disconnect the USB cable, reconnect the USB cable and turn the receiver’s back on.
power back on. Check that the IP addresses of the receiver and wireless LAN converter match the settings
! If WLAN POW ERR is still displayed after repeating the above procedure several times, there of the wireless LAN router, etc.
is a problem with the receiver or the USB cable. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a If the receiver’s DHCP setting is “OFF”, set an IP address matching the network of the base
Pioneer authorized independent service company. unit (wireless LAN router, etc.).
For example, if the wireless LAN router’s IP address is “192.168.1.1”, set the receiver’s IP
The LAN cable is not firmly connected.
address to “192.168.1.XXX” (*1), the subnet mask to “255.255.255.0”, the gateway and DNS
! Firmly connect the LAN cable (page 23).
to “192.168.1.1”.
Wireless LAN converter and base unit (wireless LAN router, etc.) are too far apart or there is an Next, set the wireless LAN converter’s IP address to “192.168.1.249” (*2).
obstacle between them. (*1) Set the “XXX” in “192.168.1.XXX” to a number between 2 and 248 that is not assigned to
! Improve the wireless LAN environment by moving the wireless LAN converter and base unit other devices.
closer together, etc. (*2) Set the “249” in “192.168.1.249” to a number between 2 and 249 that is not assigned to
There is a microwave oven or other device generating electromagnetic waves near the wireless other devices.
LAN environment. Try making the wireless LAN converter’s advanced settings.
! Use the system in a place away from microwave ovens or others device generating electro- ! The wireless LAN converter can be connected to a computer to make the advanced wireless
magnetic waves. LAN settings. For details, see the CD-ROM included for the wireless LAN converter. Check
! Avoid using devices generating electromagnetic waves as much as possible when using the the settings of the wireless LAN router, etc., then change the settings of the wireless LAN
system with the wireless LAN. converter.
Multiple wireless LAN converters are connected to the wireless LAN router. Note, however, that making the advanced wireless LAN settings will not necessarily improve
! When connecting multiple wireless LAN converters, their IP addresses must be changed. the wireless LAN environment. Be careful when changing the settings.
For example, if the wireless LAN router’s IP address is “192.168.1.1”, set the first wireless The access point is set to conceal the SSID.
LAN converter’s IP address to “192.168.1.249”, the second wireless LAN converter’s IP ! In this case, the SSID may not be displayed on the access point list screen. If not, set the
address to “192.168.1.248”, using values between 2 and 249 (such as “249” and “248”) that SSID, etc., by making the wireless LAN converter settings on the receiver manually.
are not assigned to other wireless LAN converters or to other devices.
The access point’s security settings use WEP 152-bit length code key or shared key
Wireless LAN connections cannot be established between the wireless LAN converter and base authentication.
unit (wireless LAN router, etc.). ! The receiver does not support WEP 152-bit length code key or shared key authentication.
! The wireless LAN converter must be set in order to establish wireless LAN connections. See
Network connections cannot be established even when the above measures are taken.
Wireless LAN Converter on page 72 .
! Reset the wireless LAN converter. After this, redo the wireless LAN converter’s settings.
The wireless LAN converter is properly connected to the receiver and the wireless LAN con- About resetting
verter’s indicators are lit, but the wireless LAN converter cannot be set from the receiver (the 1. Check that the wireless LAN converter’s power is on.
settings screen cannot be displayed). 2. Press the wireless LAN converter’s reset button for at least 3 seconds.
! If DHCP in the receiver’s IP settings is set to OFF and the IP address has been set manually, 3. Release the reset button.
the IP address set in the wireless LAN converter may not match. When the wireless LAN converter is restarted, the resetting procedure is completed.
En 85


About status messages Speaker Setting Guide Note
Refer to the following information when you come up with a status message while operating the In order to achieve an even better surround ! If the speakers cannot be set at equal
Home Media Gallery. effect, it is important to accurately position distances (on a circle), use the Auto MCACC
the speakers and make their volume and tone Setup speaker distance correction and Fine
Status messages Descriptions Speaker Distance functions to make them
characteristics uniform so as to finely focus the
A component on the network, including a PC, is currently being connected. multi-channel sound. equalize the distance artificially.
STARTING H.M.G.
Wait for a while.
The three major elements in positioning the
Connection Down The selected category or Internet radio station cannot be accessed. speakers are distance, angle and orienta- Step 2: Adjusting the speaker
File Format Error Cannot be played back for some reasons. tion (the direction in which the speakers are height
Track Not Found The selected song has not been found anywhere on the network. pointing).
Adjust the heights (angles) of the different
Server Error The selected server cannot be accessed. Distance: The distance of all the speakers
speakers.
should be equal.
Server Disconnected The server has been disconnected. Adjust so that the front speaker units reproduc-
Angle: The speakers should be horizontally
empty There are no files stored in the selected folder. ing mid- and high frequencies is roughly at the
symmetrical.
Preset Not Stored The selected Internet radio station is not currently registered and saved. height of the ears.
Orientation: The orientation should be hori-
If the center speaker cannot be set at the same
Out of Range The value entered is beyond the permitted range of the network settings. zontally symmetrical.
height as the front speakers, adjust its angle of
License Error The license for the contents to be played back is invalid. In most homes, however, it is not possible to
elevation to point it to the listening position.
This is displayed when the file you have attempted to register in the Favorites achieve this environment. For the distance, on
Item Already Exists Set surround speaker 1 so that it is not under
folder has already been registered. this receiver it is possible to automatically cor-
the height of the ears.
rect the speaker distance electrically to a preci-
This is displayed when you have attempted to register a file in the Favorites
Favorite List Full sion of 0.5 inch using the Full Auto MCACC
folder but the Favorites folder is already full.
Setup function (page 26). Step 3: Adjusting the speaker
VSX-53 only: For the volume and sound quality orientation
as well, accurate sound field correction using If the left and right speakers are not pointing
the equalizer and speaker phase characteristic in the same direction, the tone will not be the
correction using the Full Band Phase Control same on the right and left, and as a result
function (page 39) together make it possible to the sound field will not be reproduced prop-
achieve the ideal listening environment. erly. However, if all the speakers are pointed
towards the listening position, the sound field
Step 1: Speaker layout and will seem cramped. Testing by the Pioneer
distance adjustment Multi-channel Research Group has shown
that a good sense of sound positioning can be
Use speaker stands or the like to make sure
achieved by pointing all the speakers towards
the speakers are steady, and leave at least
an area 30 cm to 80 cm (12 inches to 31 inches)
10 cm (4 inches) from the surrounding walls.
behind the listening position (between the sur-
Position the speakers attentively so that the
round speakers and the listening position).
speakers on the left and right are at equal
However, the sense of sound positioning
angles from the listening position (center of the
can differ according to the conditions in the
adjustments). (We recommend using cords,
room and the speakers being used. In smaller
etc., when adjusting the layout.) Ideally all the
environments in particular (when the front
speakers should be equidistant from the listen-
speakers are close to the listening position),
ing position.
with this method the speakers will be pointed

86 En


too inward. We suggest you use this example of distance is corrected for electric delay, and is ! If the center speaker is not of the shielded to the receiver. See the operating instruc-
installation as reference when trying out differ- not a problem. type, install it away from the TV. tions for more on audio connections. Set the
ent installation methods. ! When installing the center speaker on top of display volume to minimum when using this
Positional relationship between the monitor, place it facing slightly downwards configuration.
Step 4: Positioning and adjusting speakers and monitor towards the listening position.
the subwoofer Note
Placing the subwoofer between the center Position of front speakers and ! If your display only has one HDMI terminal,
Important information you can only receive HDMI video from the
and front speakers makes even music sources monitor
sound more natural (if there is only one sub-
regarding the HDMI connected component.
The front speakers should be as equidistant as connection ! Depending on the component, audio output
woofer, it doesn’t matter if it is placed on the left possible to the monitor.
or right side). The low bass sound output from There are cases where you may not be able to may be limited to the number of channels
the subwoofer is not directional and there is no route HDMI signals through this receiver (this available from the connected display unit (for
need to adjust the height. Normally the sub- depends on the HDMI-equipped component example audio output is reduced to 2 channels
TV for a monitor with stereo audio limitations).
woofer is placed on the floor. Put it in a position L R you are connecting-check with the manufac-
at which it will not cancel out the bass sound turer for HDMI compatibility information). ! If you want to switch the input function, you’ll
output from the other speakers. Also note that If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly have to switch functions on both the receiver
placing it near a wall may result in sympathetic 45° to 60° through this receiver (from your component), and your display unit.
vibrations with the building that could exces- please try one of the following configurations ! Since the sound is muted on the display when
sively amplify the bass sound. when connecting up. using the HDMI connection, you must adjust
If the subwoofer must be installed near a wall, the volume on the display every time you
place it at an angle so that it is not parallel to switch input functions.
Configuration A
the wall surface. This can help reduce any sym-
Use component video cables to connect the
pathetic vibrations, but depending on the shape Position of center speaker and
of the room this could result in standing waves.
video output of your HDMI-equipped compo- Cleaning the unit
monitor nent to the receiver’s component video input.
However, even if standing waves are generated, ! Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off
Since mostly dialogs are output from the center The receiver can then convert the analog com-
their influence on the sound quality can be dust and dirt.
speaker, keeping the center speaker as close ponent video signal to a digital HDMI signal for
prevented using the Auto MCACC’s standing ! When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft
as possible to the screen makes the overall transmission to the display. For this configu-
wave control function (page 64). cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted
sound more natural. For TVs using Braun tubes, ration, use the most convenient connection five or six times with water, and wrung out
however, when installing the center speaker on (digital is recommended) for sending audio to
Step 5: Default settings with the well, and then wipe again with a dry cloth. Do
the floor, adjust its angle of elevation to point it the receiver. See the operating instructions for not use furniture wax or cleansers.
Auto MCACC Setup (auto sound towards the listening position. more on audio connections. ! Never use thinners, benzene, insecticide
field correction) function sprays or other chemicals on or near this unit,
Installation on floor (Diagram as seen
It is more effective to perform the Full Auto from the side) Note since these will corrode the surface.
MCACC Setup (page 26) procedure once ! The picture quality will change slightly during
the adjustments described above have been conversion.
Monitor
completed.
Configuration B
Note Connect your HDMI-equipped component
! The distance to the subwoofer may be slightly directly to the display using an HDMI cable.
larger than the distance actually measured Then use the most convenient connection
with a tape measure, etc. This is because this (digital is recommended) for sending audio

En 87


Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent theatre environment. THX engineers developed closest speaker as you move away from the
Surround sound formats #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; patented technologies to accurately translate middle seating position. Adaptive Decorrelation
Below is a brief description of the main sur- 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; the sound from the movie theatre environment slightly changes one surround channel’s time
round sound formats you’ll find on BDs, DVDs, 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide into the home, correcting the tonal and spatial and phase relationship with respect to the other
satellite, cable and terrestrial broadcasts, and patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol errors that occur. On this product, when the surround channel. This expands the listening
video cassettes. are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS-HD THX indicator is on, THX features are automati- position and creates-with only two speakers- the
Master Audio, and the DTS logos are trademarks cally added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, same spacious surround experience as in a
of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, THX Surround EX). movie theatre.
Dolby
Inc. All Rights Reserved.
The Dolby technologies are explained below.
Re-Equalization THX Select2 Plus
See http://www.dolby.com for more detailed
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be Before any home theatre component can be
information. About THX
excessively bright and harsh when played back THX Select2 Plus certified, it must incorporate
The THX technologies are explained below. over audio equipment in the home because film all the features above and also pass a rigorous
See http://www.thx.com for more detailed soundtracks were designed to be played back in series of quality and performance tests. Only
information. large movie theaters using very different pro- then can a product feature the THX Select2 Plus
fessional equipment. Re-Equalization restores logo, which is your guarantee that the Home
the correct tonal balance for watching a movie Theatre products you purchase will give you
soundtrack in a small home environment. superb performance for many years to come.
Manufactured under license from Dolby THX Select2 Plus requirements cover every
Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround aspect of the product including pre-amplifier
EX” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Timbre Matching
and power amplifier performance and opera-
Dolby Laboratories. The human ear changes our perception of a
tion, and hundreds of other parameters in both
sound depending on the direction from which
the digital and analog domain.
THX, the THX logo and Select2 Plus are trade- the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is
DTS
marks of THX Ltd. which are registered in some an array of surround speakers so that the sur-
The DTS technologies are explained below.
jurisdictions. All rights reserved. All other trade- round information is all around you. In a home THX Surround EX
See http://www.dts.com for more detailed theatre, you use only two speakers located to THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX
marks are the property of their respective owners.
information. the side of your head. The Timbre Matching is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories
feature filters the information going to the sur- and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film
THX Cinema processing
round speakers so that they more closely match soundtracks that have been encoded with
THX is an exclusive set of standards and tech- the tonal characteristics of the sound coming Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able
nologies established by THX Ltd. THX grew from from the front speakers. This ensures seam- to reproduce an extra channel which has been
George Lucas’ personal desire to make your less panning between the front and surround added during the mixing of the program. This
experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie speakers. channel, called Surround Back, places sounds
theatres and in your home theatre, as faith- behind the listener in addition to the currently
ful as possible to what the director intended. available front left, front center, front right,
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special
Adaptive Decorrelation
surround right, surround left and subwoofer
movie theatres called dubbing stages and are In a movie theatre, a large number of surround
channels. This additional channel provides the
designed to be played back in movie theatres speakers help create an enveloping surround
opportunity for more detailed imaging behind
with similar equipment and conditions. This sound experience, but in a home theatre there
the listener and brings more depth, spacious
same soundtrack is then transferred directly are usually only two speakers. This can make
ambience and sound localization than ever
onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is the surround speakers sound like headphones
before. Movies that were created using the
not changed for playback in a small home that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The
Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when
surround sounds will also collapse into the

88 En


released into the home consumer market may enables users to experience the true impact of THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
exhibit wording to that effect on the packaging. soundtracks regardless of the volume setting. About SIRIUS COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
A list of movies created using this technology THX Loudness Plus is automatically applied “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
can be found on the Dolby web site at http:// when listening in any THX listening mode. The WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
www.dolby.com. new THX Cinema, THX Music, and THX Games LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
Only amplifier and controller products bearing modes are tailored to apply the proper THX MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
the THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Loudness Plus settings for each type of content. PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION
new technology in the home. OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
This product may also engage the “THX About iPod DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
Surround EX” mode during the playback of EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
Surround EX encoded. In such case the infor- SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
mation delivered to the Surround Back channel are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
will be program dependent and may or may not subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Service not PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
be very pleasing depending on the particular available in Alaska and Hawaii. HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
soundtrack and the tastes of the individual LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
listener. LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
About FLAC OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
Boundary Gain CompensationTM OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
Depending on the listener’s and the subwoof- FLAC Decoder DAMAGE.
er’s position, the listener may experience an Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005,
excessive bass effect. This feature compensates 2006, 2007
for excessive bass resulting from a boundary Josh Coalson
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made
gain effect. This feature is designed to operate Redistribution and use in source and binary
for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory
when used with a subwoofer certified to THX forms, with or without modification, are permit-
has been designed to connect specifically to
Select2TM specifications. ted provided that the following conditions are
iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has
been certified by the developer to meet Apple met:
THX Loudness Plus Description performance standards. Apple is not respon- ! Redistributions of source code must retain the
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control sible for the operation of this device or its com- above copyright notice, this list of conditions
technology featured in THX Ultra2 PlusTM and pliance with safety and regulatory standards. and the following disclaimer.
THX Select2 PlusTM Certified amplifiers. With Please note that the use of this accessory ! Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
THX Loudness Plus, home theater audiences with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless the above copyright notice, this list of
can now experience the rich details in a sur- performance. conditions and the following disclaimer in
round mix at any volume level. A consequence Apple, AirPlay, the AirPlay logo, iPad, iPhone, the documentation and/or other materials
of turning the volume below Reference Level is iPod, iPod shuffle, iPod nano, iPod classic, iPod provided with the distribution.
that certain sound elements can be lost or per- touch, iTunes and Mac are trademarks of Apple ! Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation
ceived differently by the listener. THX Loudness Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. nor the names of its contributors may be used
Plus compensates for the tonal and spatial to endorse or promote products derived from
shifts that occur when the volume is reduced this software without specific prior written
by intelligently adjusting ambient surround permission.
channel levels and frequency response. This

En 89

Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input Multichannel signal formats
signal formats Input signal format Auto Surround / ALC PURE DIRECT / DIRECT
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Surround Back speaker(s): Connected
Stream Direct mode (see Using Stream Direct on page 38 ) you have selected.
Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
Dolby TrueHD EX (6.1 channel flagged)
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats <a> <a>
DTS-HD Master Audio ES
DTS-ES (Matrix) DTS-ES (Matrix)
Auto Surround / ALC / (6.1 channel flagged)
Input signal format PURE DIRECT
DIRECT DTS-ES
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete) DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel flagged)
Dolby Digital Surround 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE DTS sources (5.1 channel encoding) Straight decoding Straight decoding
DTS Surround Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA DTS-HD sources As above As above
Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources As above As above
Analog sources As above ANALOG DIRECT (stereo) Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected
PCM sources As above PCM DIRECT DVD-A sources/Multi-ch PCM Straight decoding Straight decoding
DVD-A sources As above As above SACD sources (5.1 channel encoding) As above As above
SACD sources As above Stereo playback Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources As above As above
Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected a Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
Dolby Digital Surround 2 Pro Logic II MOVIE 2 Pro Logic II MOVIE
DTS Surround Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA
Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback
Analog sources As above ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
PCM sources As above PCM DIRECT
DVD-A sources As above As above
SACD sources As above Stereo playback

90 En


decoder can then use for enhanced surround THX Calibrating the sound field/
Glossary listening with greater sound detail. The THX technologies are explained below. Improving the sound quality
Dolby Pro Logic IIz See http://www.thx.com for more detailed
Phase Control
Adding a pair of speakers above the front left information.
Audio formats/Decoding The Phase Control technology incorporated into
and right speakers adds expressiveness in the THX Cinema this receiver’s design provides coherent sound
Dolby
vertical direction to the previous horizontally- A mode for playing in a home theater environ- reproduction through the use of phase match-
The Dolby technologies are explained below.
oriented sound field. The height channel ment the sound tracks of theater movies that ing for an optimal sound image at your listening
See http://www.dolby.com for more detailed
strengthens the sound field’s sense of three- have been recorded and edited for playback in position.
information.
dimensionality and air, producing presence and large spaces such as movie theaters.
Dolby Digital expansion.
Full Band Phase Control
THX Music VSX-53 only:
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio
DTS A mode adjusted mainly for listening to music The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates
coding system widely used in cinemas, and
The DTS technologies are explained below. that has been masterized at a higher level than the frequency-phase characteristics of the
in the home for DVD and digital broadcast
See http://www.dts.com for more detailed movie sound tracks. speakers connected.
soundtracks.
information. THX Games
Dolby TrueHD Virtual Surround Back
DTS Digital Surround A mode for playing the sound of games with When you’re not using surround back speakers,
Dolby TrueHD is the lossless encoding technol-
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio spatial fidelity. In many cases the sound is selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual
ogy developed for high-definition optical discs
coding system from DTS Inc. now widely used mixed in the same way as for movies, but this surround back channel through your surround
in the upcoming era.
for DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs, mode is meant for small environments rather speakers. You can choose to listen to sources
Dolby Digital Plus digital broadcasts, and video games. than the large environments of theaters. with no surround back channel information.
Dolby Digital Plus is the audio technology for
DTS-HD Master Audio THX Surround EX Virtual Height
all high-definition programming and media. It
DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that A mode using technology developed jointly When you’re not using front height speak-
combines the efficiency to meet future broad-
delivers master audio sources recorded in a by Dolby Laboratories and THX for creating a ers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a
cast demands with the power and flexibility to
professional studio to listeners without any loss sound field behind the listeners. virtual front height channel through your front
realize the full audio potential expected in the
of data, preserving audio quality. THX Loudness Plus speakers.
upcoming high-definition era.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio A mode creating a rich, subtle surround sound Virtual Depth
Dolby Digital Surround EX
A high definition audio technology by which field through optimal calibration of the volume When this mode is selected, the sound field
Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for
signals can be transferred over HDMI cables. and frequency response of the individual chan- expands virtually to behind the display, result-
EXtended) is an extension of Dolby Digital
DTS-ES nels according to the volume level. ing in a sound field with the same depth as
encoding whereby a surround back channel
is matrixed into the surround left/right chan- DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) Decoding the 3D picture to achieve a better sense of
nels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for is a decoder that is capable of decoding both A technology for converting digital signals presence.
compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 that have been compressed upon recording Auto Sound Retriever
decoding, as well as for decoding using Dolby encoded sources. by a digital signal processing circuit, etc., into The Auto Sound Retriever feature employs
Digital EX. DTS Neo:6 the original signals. The term “decoding” (or DSP technology to restore sound pressure
DTS Neo:6 can generate 7.1 channel surround “matrix decoding”) is also used for the technol- and smooth jagged artifacts left over after
Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround
sound from any matrixed stereo source (such ogy which converts 2-channel sound sources compression.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the
as video or TV) and from 5.1 channel sources. into multiple channels or expands 5.1-channel With some audio inputs, the Sound Retriever
Dolby Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decod-
signals into 6.1 or 7.1 channels. effect is automatically optimized based on the
ing system. DTS Neural Surround
Dolby Surround is an encoding system which DTS Neural Surround can generate 7.1 chan- bitrate information of the contents that have
embeds surround sound information within nel surround sound from any matrixed stereo been input to achieve high sound quality.
a stereo soundtrack, which a Dolby Pro Logic source (such as video or TV).

En 91


Sound Retriever Air changed or a Control with HDMI-compatible from NEMS and BridgeCo or an authorized For more information check the official
Sound Retriever Air compensates for reduced component is played. subsidiary.” Microsoft website.
sound quality due to compression when send- ! The receiver’s power is also set to standby, aacPlus Windows Media DRM
ing Bluetooth signals. when the TV’s power is set to standby. AAC decoder uses aacPlus developed by Coding Windows Media DRM is a DRM (Digital Rights
PQLS ARC (Audio Return Channel) Technologies. (www.codingtechnologies.com) Management) service for the Windows Media
Jitterless high quality playback is possible by When a TV supporting the HDMI ARC (Audio platform. It is designed to provide secure
connecting a PQLS-compatible player with Return Channel) function is connected to the delivery of audio and/or video content over an
HDMI connections. receiver, the sound of the TV can be input via IP network to a PC or other playback device in
ALC (Auto Level Control) the HDMI OUT terminal. such a way that the distributor can control how
In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this The sound of the TV can be input from the that content is used. The WMDRM-protected
receiver equalizes playback sound levels. receiver’s HDMI OUT terminal, so connection content can only be played back on a compo-
with the TV can be completed with a single FLAC nent supporting the WMDRM service.
Also, the low and high frequency sounds, dia-
HDMI cable. FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) is an audio
logs, surround effects, etc., that are difficult to Router
format allows lossless codec. Audio is com-
hear when the volume is low are adjusted to be A device for relaying data flowing on a network
pressed in FLAC without any loss in quality.
optimal for the volume level. This mode is par- Network function to another network. In homes, routers often
For more details about FLAC, visit the following
ticularly optimum when listening at night. AirPlay also function as DHCP servers. Products with
website:
Front Stage Surround Advance This receiver supports AirPlay audio streaming built-in wireless LAN access points are called
http://flac.sourceforge.net/
With the Front Stage Surround Advance fea- from iPod touch (2nd, 3rd and 4th generations), “wireless LAN routers”.
Windows Media DHCP
ture, you can enjoy seamless, natural surround iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPad with iOS 4.2 or later,
Windows Media is a multimedia framework for
sound effects using only the front speakers, and iTunes 10.1 (Mac and PC) or later. Abbreviation of Dynamic Host Configuration
media creation and distribution for Microsoft
without deteriorating the quality of the original For more information, see the Apple website Protocol. A protocol for automatically assign-
Windows. Windows Media is either a regis-
sound. (http://www.apple.com). ing such setting information as IP addresses
tered trademark or trademark of Microsoft
MCACC DLNA within network connections. This offers conve-
Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a nience in that, when enabled, it allows network
Use an application licensed by Microsoft
accurate surround sound setup, which includes cross-industry organization of consumer elec- functions to be used simply by connecting the
Corporation to author, distribute, or play
the advanced features of Professional Acoustic tronics, computing industry and mobile device devices to the network.
Windows Media formatted content. Using
Calibration EQ. companies. Digital Living provides consumers an application unauthorized by Microsoft Wireless LAN/Wi-Fi
with easy sharing of digital media through a Corporation is subject to malfunction. “Wi-Fi” (Wireless Fidelity) is a trademark
HDMI wired or wireless network in the home. coined by the Wi-Fi Alliance trade associa-
Windows Media Player 11/ tion to increase recognition of wireless LAN
Control with HDMI function vTuner Windows Media Player 12
vTuner is a paid online database service that standards. With the increase in the number
Synchronized operations below with a Control Windows Media Player is software to deliver of devices connected to computers in recent
with HDMI-compatible Pioneer TV or Blu-ray allows you to listen to radio and TV broadcasts music, photos and movies from a Microsoft
on the Internet. vTuner lists thousands of sta- years, Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminat-
Disc player or with a component of another Windows computer to home stereo systems ing the complexity of making connections with
make that supports the Control with HDMI tions from over 100 different countries around and TVs.
the globe. For more detail about vTuner, visit the LAN cables by using wireless connection. As
functions are possible when the component is With this software, you can play back files a way of reassuring users, products that have
connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable. following website: stored on the PC through various devices wher-
http://www.radio-pioneer.com passed interoperability tests carry the logo
! The receiver’s volume can be set and the ever you like in your home. “Wi-Fi Certified” to indicate that compatibility is
sound can be muted using the TV’s remote “This product is protected by certain intel- This software can be downloaded from
lectual property rights of NEMS and BridgeCo. assured.
control. Microsoft’s website.
! The receiver’s input switches over Use or distribution of such technology outside ! Windows Media Player 11 (for Windows XP or WPS
automatically when the TV’s input is of this product is prohibited without a license Windows Vista) Abbreviation of Wi-Fi Protected Setup. A stan-
! Windows Media Player 12 (for Windows 7) dard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance industry

92 En


group for a function allowing settings related ! To enable Bluetooth communication, pairing
to interconnection of WPS-compatible wireless should be done with both your system and
LAN devices and encryption to be made with Bluetooth wireless technology device.
simple operations. There are a number of meth-
ods, including push-button configuration and Receiver function
PIN code configuration. This AV receiver sup-
ports both push-button configuration and PIN Operation Mode
code configuration. This receiver is equipped with a great number
of functions and settings. The Operation Mode
SSID feature is provided for users who find it difficult
Abbreviation of Service Set IDentifier. A wire- to master all these functions and settings.
less LAN access point identifier. Can be set as
desired using up to 32 characters of English
letters and numbers.

Bluetooth function
Bluetooth wireless technology
A short-range wireless communications
standard for digital devices. Information is
exchanged between devices several meters to
several tens of meters apart using radio waves.
It uses radio waves on the 2.4 GHz band which
does not require applications for licenses or
usage registration for applications conducting
wireless exchange of digital information at rela-
tively low speeds, such as computer mouses
and keyboards, mobile phones, smartphones,
text and audio information for PDAs, etc.
Pairing
“Pairing” must be done before you start play-
back of Bluetooth wireless technology content
using the Bluetooth ADAPTER. Make sure to
perform pairing the first time you operate the
system or any time pairing data is cleared.
The pairing step is necessary to register the
Bluetooth wireless technology device to enable
Bluetooth communications. For more details,
see also the operating instructions of your
Bluetooth wireless technology device.
! Pairing is required when you first use the
Bluetooth wireless technology device and
Bluetooth ADAPTER.

En 93


Internet radio Virtual Height
Features index See Listening to Internet radio stations on page See Setting the Audio options on page 50 .
42 . Virtual Surround Back
Operation Mode
See Operation Mode Setup on page 28 . vTuner See Setting the Audio options on page 50 .
See Listening to Internet radio stations on page Virtual Depth
AVNavigator
42 . See Setting the Audio options on page 50 .
See About using AVNavigator (included
CD-ROM) on page 7 . Rhapsody Digital Video Converter
See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page See Setting the Video options on page 52 .
Full Auto MCACC
42 .
See Automatically conducting optimum sound Pure Cinema
tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 26 . Sirius Internet Radio See Setting the Video options on page 52 .
See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page
Automatic MCACC (Expert) Progressive Motion
42 .
See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 62 . See Setting the Video options on page 52 .
Pandora
Manual MCACC setup Advanced Video Adjust
See Playback with Home Media Gallery on page
See Manual MCACC setup on page 64 . See Setting the Video options on page 52 .
42 .
PQLS Auto Power Down
DLNA
See Setting the PQLS function on page 48 . See The Other Setup menu on page 73 .
See About network playback on page 44 .
Phase Control
AirPlay
See Better sound using Phase Control on page
See Using AirPlay on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad,
39 .
and iTunes on page 41 .
Full Band Phase Control
Wireless LAN
VSX-53 only:
See Connecting to a wireless LAN on page 23 .
See Better sound using Phase Control and Full
Band Phase Control on page 39 . Playback High Resolution audio file
See About playable file formats on page 45 .
Standing Wave
See Setting the Audio options on page 50 . Slideshow
See Playing back photo files stored on a USB
Phase Control Plus
memory device on page 31 .
See Setting the Audio options on page 50 .
Bluetooth ADAPTER
Auto Sound Retriever
See Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment
of Music on page 35 .
ALC (Auto Level Control)
ARC (Audio Return Channel)
See Auto playback on page 37 .
See HDMI Setup on page 47 .
Front Stage Surround Advance
SACD Gain
See Enjoying various types of playback using the
listening modes on page 37 .
Auto delay
Sound Retriever Air
See Enjoying various types of playback using the
listening modes on page 37 . Height Gain (Dolby Pro Logic llz Height
option)
Dialog Enhancement
94 En


Video Section Number of Furnished Parts
Specifications Signal level MCACC Setup microphone ................................ 1
Composite Video .......................1 Vp-p (75 W) Remote control unit ............................................ 1
Amplifier section
Component Video .............Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 W), AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries .................... 2
Continuous average power output of 110
PB/PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 W) iPod cable ............................................................ 1
watts* per channel, min., at 8 ohms, from 20
Corresponding maximum resolution AM loop antenna ................................................. 1
Hz to 20 000 Hz with no more than 0.08 %**
Component Video ...................1080p (1125p) FM wire antenna ................................................. 1
total harmonic distortion.
(Video convert off) Warranty card...................................................... 1
Continuous Power Output
Digital In/Out Section Power cord
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 W, 0.08 %)
HDMI terminal ............................19-pin (Not DVI) CD-ROM (AVNavigator)
Front ..................................... 110 W + 110 W
HDMI output type .................................5 V, 55 mA These operating instructions
Center ...................................................110 W
Surround .............................. 110 W + 110 W USB terminal ............USB2.0 Full Speed (Type A)
Surround back (Front height/wide) iPod terminal ......... USB, and Video (Composite) Note
.............................................. 110 W + 110 W SIRIUS antenna cable.........8-pin mini DIN cable ! Specifications and the design are subject to
Continuous Power Output (1 kHz, 6 W, 1.0 %) ADAPTER PORT terminal ..................5 V, 100 mA possible modifications without notice, due to
Front ..................................... 150 W + 150 W WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER terminal improvements.
Center ...................................................150 W .............................................................5 V, 600 mA ! This product includes FontAvenue® fonts
Surround .............................. 150 W + 150 W Integrated Control Section licensed by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a
Surround back (Front height/wide) Control (SR) terminal .....ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO) registered trademark of NEC Corporation.
.............................................. 150 W + 150 W Control (IR) terminal ......ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)
Total harmonic distortion .......................... 0.06 % IR signal ...............High Active (High Level: 2.0 V)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 100 W + 100 W, 8 W) 12 V Trigger terminal ......ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)
Guaranteed speaker impedance ...... 16 W to 8 W, 12 V Trigger output type ..........12 V, Total 150 mA
less than 8 W to 6 W (setting required) RS-232C cable type ...................9-pin, cross type,
* Measured pursuant to the Federal Trade female-female
Commission’s Trade Regulation rule on Power EXTENSION terminal .........................5 V, 150 mA
Output Claims for Amplifiers Network Section
** Measured by Audio Spectrum Analyzer LAN terminal .................10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX
Audio Section Miscellaneous
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) Power requirements ................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz
LINE ......................................... 350 mV/47 kW Power consumption....................................570 W
Output (Level/Impedance) In standby
REC ......................................... 335 mV/2.2 kW ............. 0.1 W (HDMI Setup – Control : OFF)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio .............. 0.3 W (HDMI Setup – Control : ON)
(IHF, short circuited, A network) Dimensions
LINE .....................................................103 dB ....... 435 mm (W) x 185.6 mm (H) x 440.3 mm (D)
Frequency Response .....5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB (17 3/16 in. (W) x 7 5/16 in. (H) x 17 3/8 in. (D))
(Pure Direct Mode) Weight (without package)
Tuner Section VSX-53................................... 13.9 kg (30.6 lb)
Frequency Range (FM) ......87.5 MHz to 108 MHz VSX-52................................... 13.7 kg (30.2 lb)
Antenna Input (FM) .................. 75 W unbalanced
Frequency Range (AM) ........531 kHz to 1602 kHz
Antenna (AM) .............. Loop antenna (balanced)
En 95


KEC 0104 Olevia 0048, 0054, 0059 Scotch 0006 Vizio 0004, 0070, 0071,
Preset code list Kenwood 0004, 0006, Onwa 0008, 0104 Scott 0004, 0006, 0007, 0108
0100 Oppo 0095 0008, 0009, 0090, 0104 Wards 0000, 0001, 0004,
You should have no problem controlling a component if you find the manufacturer in this list, but
KLH 0106 Optimus 0105 Sears 0000, 0004, 0006, 0005, 0006, 0009, 0100,
please note that there are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the
Kloss Novabeam 0008, Optoma 0075 0009, 0101, 0102, 0103 0101
model that you are using. There are also cases where only certain functions may be controllable
0012 Optonica 0014 Sharp 0004, 0006, 0007, Waycon 0102
after assigning the proper preset code. KTV 0008, 0100, 0104, Orion 0025 0014, 0033 Westinghouse 0047,
0110 Panasonic 0003, 0010, Sheng Chia 0014 0051
Important LG 0005, 0052, 0078, 0017, 0027, 0105, 0114, Shogun 0004 White Westinghouse
! We do not guarantee the operations of all the manufacturers and devices listed. Operation may not 0097 0120, 0121, 0124, 0125 Signature 0001 0023
be possible even if a preset code is entered. Logik 0001 Penney 0100, 0102 Sony 0002, 0018, 0029, Yamaha 0004, 0005,
Luxman 0004, 0006 Philco 0003, 0004, 0005, 0030, 0031, 0034 0006, 0100
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control, you can still teach
LXI 0000, 0006, 0101, 0006, 0007, 0100, 0101 Soundesign 0004, 0006, Zenith 0001, 0004, 0011,
the remote individual commands from another remote control (see Programming signals from other
0102 Philips 0003, 0004, 0007, 0008, 0009, 0104 0015, 0099
remote controls on page 57 ). Magnavox 0004, 0006, 0019, 0020, 0101 Squareview 0103
0019, 0020, 0037, 0042, Philips Magnavox 0019 SSS 0004, 0008, 0104
TV 0100, 0101 Pilot 0004, 0100 Starlite 0008, 0104
Pioneer 0004, 0006, Carnivale 0100 Dumont 0004, 0011, Goldstar 0004, 0005, Majestic 0001 Polaroid 0057, 0106 Superscan 0014
0113, 0115, 0116, 0117, Carver 0101 0099 0006, 0007, 0100 Marantz 0004, 0006, Portland 0004, 0005, Supre-Macy 0012
0119, 0122, 0123 CCE 0110 Durabrand 0041, 0103, Gradiente 0066 0062, 0100, 0101 0006 Supreme 0002
Admiral 0001, 0014 Celebrity 0002 0104 Grunpy 0008, 0009, 0104 Matsushita 0105 Prima 0065 SVA 0088
Adventura 0012 Celera 0106 Dwin 0014 Haier 0112 Maxent 0087, 0107 Princeton 0097 Sylvania 0004, 0006,
Aiwa 0002 Changhong 0106 Electroband 0002 Hallmark 0004, 0006 Megapower 0097 Prism 0010 0049, 0079, 0080, 0100,
Akai 0002, 0100 Citizen 0004, 0006, 0008, Electrograph 0107 Harman/Kardon 0101 Megatron 0006 Proscan 0000 0101, 0103
Albatron 0097 0100 Electrohome 0002, 0003, Harvard 0008, 0104 Memorex 0001, 0005, Proton 0004, 0006, 0007 Symphonic 0008, 0041,
Alleron 0009 Clarion 0104 0004, 0006 Havermy 0014 0006, 0041 Protron 0055 0103, 0104
America Action 0104 Coby 0056 Element 0082 Hewlett Packard 0053 MGA 0004, 0005, 0006, Proview 0068 Syntax 0054
Amtron 0008 Colortyme 0004, 0006 Emerson 0004, 0006, Hisense 0069 0100 Pulsar 0004, 0011, 0099 Syntax-Brillian 0054
Anam 0104 Concerto 0004, 0006 0007, 0008, 0009, 0023, Hitachi 0004, 0006, 0007 Midland 0010, 0011, Quasar 0003, 0010, 0105 Tandy 0014
Anam National 0003, Contec 0104 0103, 0104 Hyundai 0098 0099 Radio Shack 0100, 0104 Tatung 0003, 0108
0008 Contec/Cony 0007, 0008 Emprex 0092 Ilo 0089, 0091 Mintek 0091 Radio Shack/Realistic Technics 0010, 0105
AOC 0004, 0005, 0006, Craig 0008, 0104 Envision 0004, 0006, IMA 0008 Mitsubishi 0004, 0005, 0000, 0004, 0006, 0007, Techwood 0004, 0006,
0100 Crosley 0081, 0101 0100 Infinity 0101 0006, 0014, 0045 0008 0010
Apex 0021, 0102, 0106 Crown 0008, 0104 Epson 0061 InFocus 0074 Monivision 0097 RCA 0000, 0003, 0004, Teknika 0001, 0004,
Audiovox 0008, 0104 CTX 0063 ESA 0103 Initial 0091 Montgomery Ward 0005, 0006, 0013, 0024, 0005, 0006, 0007, 0008,
Aventura 0103 Curtis Mathes 0000, Fujitsu 0009 Insignia 0085, 0086 0001 0035 0009, 0101, 0104
Axion 0094 0004, 0006, 0014, 0100, Funai 0008, 0009, 0103, Inteq 0099 Motorola 0003, 0014 Realistic 0100, 0104 TMK 0004, 0006
Bang & Olufsen 0111 0101 0104 Janeil 0012 MTC 0004, 0005, 0006, Runco 0011, 0099, 0100 TNCi 0099
Belcor 0004 CXC 0008, 0104 Futuretech 0008, 0104 JBL 0101 0100 Sampo 0004, 0006, 0100, Toshiba 0026, 0028,
Bell & Howell 0001 Cytron 0093 Gateway 0067, 0107, JC Penney 0000, 0004, Multitech 0008, 0104, 0107 0036, 0038, 0040, 0043,
Benq 0064 Daewoo 0004, 0005, 0108 0005, 0006, 0010 0110 Samsung 0004, 0005, 0102
Bradford 0008, 0104 0006, 0023 GE 0000, 0003, 0004, JCB 0002 NAD 0006, 0102 0006, 0007, 0022, 0032, Vector Research 0100
Brillian 0109 Daytron 0004, 0006 0006, 0010, 0016, 0039 Jensen 0004, 0006 NEC 0003, 0004, 0005, 0076, 0077, 0083, 0100, Vidikron 0101
Brockwood 0004 Dell 0073 GFM 0080, 0084 JVC 0007, 0010, 0044, 0006, 0100 0110 Vidtech 0004, 0005, 0006
Broksonic 0104 DiamondVision 0096 Gibralter 0004, 0011, 5064 Net-TV 0107 Sansui 0025 Viewsonic 0058, 0107
Candle 0004, 0006, 0012, Dimensia 0000 0099, 0100 Kawasho 0002, 0004, Nikko 0006, 0100 Sanyo 0004, 0050 Viking 0012
0100 Disney 0046 0006 Norcent 0060 Sceptre 0072 Viore 0089

96 En


DVD DVR (BDR, HDR)
If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations
with the preset codes for the BD, DVR (BDR, HDR). with the preset codes for the DVD, BD.
Pioneer 2014, 2158 Daewoo 2021, 2087 Kenwood 2028, 2068 Rio 2087 Pioneer 2103, 2150, Panasonic 2100, 2106 Sony 2105, 2108, 2109,
Accurian 2092 Denon 2026, 2068 KLH 2070, 2080 Rowa 2071 2151, 2152, 2153, 2154, Sharp 2104, 2112 2110, 2113
Advent 2072 Desay 2055 Koss 2024, 2069, 2075 Samsung 2009, 2011, 2155, 2156, 2157 Toshiba 2111
Aiwa 2012 DiamondVision 2042 Landel 2093 2015, 2031, 2044, 2068
Akai 2066 Disney 2022 Lasonic 2085 Sansui 2066
Alco 2070 Durabrand 2090 Lenoxx 2074, 2090 Sanyo 2066, 2083 VCR
Allegro 2087 Emerson 2067, 2082, LG 2019, 2051, 2061, Sharp 2035 Pioneer 1035 Emerson 1003, 1004, Linksys 1017 Proscan 1030
Amphion MediaWorks 2091 2082, 2087 Sherwood 2063 ABS 1017 1005 Lloyd’s 1005 Pulsar 1018
2037 Enterprise 2082 Liquid Video 2075 Shinsonic 2086 Adventura 1005 Expressvu 1029 LXI 1003 Quarter 1001
AMW 2037 ESA 2053, 2091 Liteon 2025, 2092 Sonic Blue 2087 Aiwa 1005 Fisher 1001 Magnavox 1004, 1018 Quartz 1001
Apex 2002, 2018, 2079, Fisher 2083 Magnavox 2067, 2076, Sony 2003, 2004, 2010, Alienware 1017 Fuji 1004 Magnin 1003 Quasar 1004
2080 Funai 2091 2091 2012, 2027, 2046, 2047, American High 1004 Funai 1005 Marantz 1000, 1001, Radio Shack 1003
Apple 2058 GE 2016, 2077, 2080 Memorex 2066 2048 Asha 1002 Garrard 1005 1004 Radio Shack/Realistic
Arrgo 2088 GFM 2043 Microsoft 2077 Sungale 2054 Audio Dynamics 1000 Gateway 1017 Marta 1003 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004,
Aspire 2073 Go Video 2087 Mintek 2038, 2080, 2086 Superscan 2067 Audiovox 1003 GE 1002, 1004 Matsushita 1004 1005
Astar 2052 Gradiente 2068 Mitsubishi 2020 Sylvania 2023, 2067, Bang & Olufsen 1032 GOI 1029 Media Center PC 1017 Radix 1003
Audiovox 2070 Greenhill 2080 Nesa 2080 2091 Beaumark 1002 Goldstar 1000, 1003 MEI 1004 Randex 1003
Axion 2040 Haier 2094 Next Base 2093 Symphonic 2023 Bell & Howell 1001 Gradiente 1005 Memorex 1001, 1002, RCA 1002, 1004, 1007,
Bang & Olufsen 2081 Harman/Kardon 2030, Nexxtech 2056 Teac 2070 Calix 1003 Harley Davidson 1005 1003, 1004, 1005, 1018, 1016, 1020, 1022, 1030,
Blaupunkt 2080 2084 Onkyo 2076 Technics 2068 Candle 1002, 1003 Harman/Kardon 1000 1019 1031
Blue Parade 2078 Hitachi 2011 Oppo 2041, 2057 Theta Digital 2078 Canon 1004 Headquarter 1001 MGN Technology 1002 Realistic 1001, 1002,
Boston 2059 Hiteker 2079 Oritron 2069, 2075 Toshiba 2001, 2006, Citizen 1002, 1003 Hewlett Packard 1017 Microsoft 1017 1003, 1004, 1005
Broksonic 2066 iLive 2062 Panasonic 2005, 2007, 2049, 2066, 2076 Colortyme 1000 HNS 1016 Mind 1017 ReplayTV 1026
California Audio Labs Ilo 2038 2017, 2032, 2033, 2050, Trutech 2000 Craig 1002, 1003 Howard Computers Mitsubishi 1010 Ricavision 1017
2068 Initial 2038, 2080 2068, 2076 Urban Concepts 2076 Curtis Mathes 1000, 1017 Motorola 1004 Runco 1018
CambridgeSoundWorks Insignia 2036, 2064, Philips 2045, 2076 US Logic 2086 1002, 1004 HP 1017 MTC 1002 Samsung 1002, 1016,
2065 2091 Proceed 2079 Venturer 2070 Cybernex 1002 HTS 1029 Multitech 1002, 1005 1022, 1024
CineVision 2087 Integra 2078 Proscan 2077 Xbox 2077 CyberPower 1017 Hughes Network NEC 1000, 1001 Sanky 1018
Coby 2029 iSymphony 2060 Qwestar 2069 Yamaha 2005, 2068 Daewoo 1005 Systems 1016, 1020, Nikko 1003 Sansui 1014, 1019
Curtis Mathes 2089 JBL 2084 RCA 2008, 2016, 2070, Zenith 2019, 2076, 2082, DBX 1000 1022, 1023, 1024 Niveus Media 1017 Sanyo 1001, 1002
CyberHome 2000, 2088 JVC 2013 2077, 2078, 2080 2087 Dell 1017 Humax 1016, 1020 Noblex 1002 Sears 1001, 1003, 1004
Cytron 2039 Kawasaki 2070 Regent 2074 DIRECTV 1016, 1020, Hush 1017 Northgate 1017 Sharp 1012
1022, 1023, 1024, 1027, iBUYPOWER 1017 Olympus 1004 Shogun 1002
1030, 1031 Instant Replay 1004 Optimus 1003 Singer 1004
BD Dish Network 1029 JC Penney 1000, 1001, Orion 1014, 1019 Sonic Blue 1026
If operations are not possible using the preset codes below, you may be able to conduct operations Dishpro 1029 1002, 1003, 1004 Panasonic 1004, 1008 Sony 1006, 1009, 1017,
with the preset codes for the DVD, DVR (BDR, HDR). Durabrand 1018 JCL 1004 Philco 1004 1021
Pioneer 2159, 2160 Kenwood 2044 Panasonic 2114, 2115, Sony 2120, 2121, 2122, Dynatech 1005 JVC 1000, 1001, 1020, Philips 1004, 1011, 1016, Stack 1017
Denon 2147, 2148, 2149 LG 2123, 2124 2116 2129 Echostar 1029 1029 1020, 1022, 1023, 1024, STS 1004
Hitachi 2144, 2145, 2146 Marantz 2139, 2140 Philips 2117 Toshiba 2125, 2099 Electrohome 1003 Kenwood 1000, 1001 1025 Sylvania 1004, 1005
JVC 2127, 2128, 2130, Mitsubishi 2137, 2138 Samsung 2119 Yamaha 2134, 2135, Electrophonic 1003 Kodak 1003, 1004 Philips Magnavox 1011 Symphonic 1005
2131, 2132, 2133 Onkyo 2126 Sharp 2141, 2142, 2143 2136 LG 1003 Pilot 1003 Systemax 1017

En 97


Tagar Systems 1017 Tivo 1016, 1020, 1021, UltimateTV 1031 Wards 1002, 1003, 1004,
Tandy 1001 1022, 1025 Unitech 1002 1005 Satellite Set Top Box (SAT/PVR Combination)
Tashiko 1003 TMK 1002 Vector Research 1000 Yamaha 1000, 1001 Pioneer 0126, 0128 Dish Network System Hughes Network Samsung 6114
Teac 1005 Toshiba 1015, 1017, Video Concepts 1000 Zenith 1013, 1018 Bell ExpressVu 6002, 6002, 6089 Systems 6113, 6114, Sonicview 6055, 6107
Technics 1004 1028 Videosonic 1002 ZT Group 1017 6003 Dishpro 6002, 6089 6115, 6116 Sony 6062
Teknika 1003, 1004, Totevision 1002, 1003 Viewsonic 1017 DirecTV 6070, 6110, Echostar 6002, 6089, JVC 6003 Star Choice 6032
1005 Touch 1017 Voodoo 1017 6062, 6113, 6060, 6059, 6003 Motorola 6032 Tivo 6113, 6114, 6115,
6114, 6115, 6116 Expressvu 6002 Philips 6113, 6114 6116
Proscan 6110
Satellite Set Top Box
Pioneer 0126, 6097, Echostar 6002, 6089, Next Level 6032 Smart 6051
6098, 6145 6036, 6005, 6003, 6004, nfusion 6015 Sonicview 6055, 6107 Cable Set Top Box
ADB 6035, 6001 6146 Nokia 6025, 6026, 6118, Sony 6062, 6063, 6030, Pioneer 6028, 6029, Director 6073 Myrio 6077, 6078 Shaw 6074
Akai 6102 Expressvu 6002, 6004 6119, 6121 6143 6095, 6099 Emerson 6122 Noos 6040 Starcom 6122
Alba 6005, 6013, 6011 Fujitsu 6133, 6134, 6135 Pace 6035, 6005, 6030, Star Choice 6032 ABC 6122 Fosgate 6072 Pace 6074, 6029, 6028, Stargate 6122
Allsat 6102 Fortec Star 6123, 6023 6031 Star Trak 6032 Accuphase 6122 General Instrument 6106, 6083 Suddenlink 6074, 6029
Alltech 6011 Fresat 6014 Panarex 6016 TechniSat 6033 Amino 6077, 6078 6073, 6072, 6122 Panasonic 6112, 6083 Supercable 6072
Amstrad 6033, 6030, Funai 6070 Panasonic 6008, 6009, Thomson 6110, 6111, Auna 6082 Homecast 6024 Paragon 6112 Time Warner 6074,
6044 GE 6111 6030, 6136, 6137, 6138 6014 BCC 6072 i3 Micro 6077 Penney 6112 6029, 6058
Anttron 6013 General Instrument Pansat 6016, 6022 Tivo 6113, 6114, 6115, Bell & Howell 6122 Insight 6074, 6073, 6029 Philips 6012 Tivo 6076
Asat 6102 6032 Philips 6002, 6113, 6038, 6116 Bright House 6074, 6029 Jebsee 6122 Pulsar 6112 Toshiba 6112
Austar 6000, 6045 GOI 6002, 6004 6054, 6060, 6059, 6102, Toshiba 6038, 6054, Cable One 6074, 6029 Jerrold 6073, 6072, 6122 Quasar 6112 United Cable 6072, 6122
BELL 6160 Grundig 6007, 6030 6103, 6030, 6114 6039, 6130 Cablevision 6074, 6029 Knology 6029 Regal 6072 US Electronics 6072
Bell ExpressVu 6002, Hirschmann 6033 Primestar 6032, 6147 TPS 6041 Charter 6074, 6029, 6058 Macab 6040 Rogers 6029 Videoway 6112
6003 Hisense 6020 Proscan 6110, 6111 Triasat 6033 Cisco 6029, 6028, 6083 Mediacom 6074, 6029 Runco 6112 Zenith 6112
British Sky Hitachi 6038, 6049, 6132 Proton 6020 Ultrasat 6021 Comcast 6074, 6029, Memorex 6112 Samsung 6095
Broadcasting 6030 Houston 6002 RadioShack 6002, 6111, US Digital 6020 1982 Motorola 6074, 6073, Scientific Atlanta 6029,
Canal 6105 HTS 6002, 6004 6032 USDTV 6020 Cox 6074, 6029 6072, 6029, 6122, 6094 6028, 6027, 6112
Chaparral 6034 Hughes Network Radix 6036 ViewSat 6048 Digeo 6029, 6058 MTS 6094 Sejin 6077
CNS 6001 Systems 6113, 6038, RCA 6002, 6110, 6111, Voom 6032
Coolsat 6021 6054, 6114, 6115, 6116 6113, 6109, 6061, 6114, Zehnder 6101
Crossdigital 6043 Hyundai 6016 6142, 6144, 6148 Zenith 6042, 6069, 6037, Cable Set Top Box (Cable/PVR Combination)
Digenius 6104 iLo 6020 SA 6124, 6126, 6158, 6125, 6127, 6129 Pioneer 0127, 6029 Comcast 6074, 6029, Mediacom 6074, 6029 Shaw 6074
Digiwave 6053 Innova 6059 6159 Amino 6078 6083, 6076 Motorola 6074, 6081 Suddenlink 6074, 6029
DirecTV 6070, 6110, Jerrold 6032, 6128, 6149, Saba 6014 Bright House 6074, 6029 Cox 6074, 6029 Myrio 6078 Supercable 6072
6111, 6062, 6063, 6113, 6150, 6151, 6152, 6153, Sagem 6041, 6120 Cable One 6074, 6029 Digeo 6081, 6058 Pace 6029 Time Warner 6074,
6008, 6038, 6054, 6069, 6154, 6155, 6156, 6157 Samsung 6070, 6113, Cablevision 6074, 6029 Homecast 6024 Panasonic 6083 6029, 6058
6060, 6059, 6043, 6018, JVC 6002, 6003, 6004 6091, 6043, 6017, 6114, Charter 6074, 6029, 6058 Insight 6074, 6029 Rogers 6029 Tivo 6076
6114, 6115, 6116, 6093 Kathrein 6096 6093 Cisco 6029, 6083 Knology 6029 Scientific Atlanta 6029
Dish Network System Lava 6053 Sanyo 6046
6002, 6089, 6003, 6004 LG 6047, 6018 Sat Cruiser 6015
Dishpro 6002, 6089, Marantz 6102 Schwaiger 6066
6004 McIntosh 6032 SEI 6139
DX Antenna 6140 Mitsubishi 6038 Siemens 6007, 6036
E Aichi 6141 Motorola 6032, 6042 SKY 6042, 6059, 6030,
NEC 6050, 6131 6031
Netsat 6059 SM Electronic 6011

98 En


CD (SACD)
Pioneer 5065, 5066 Kenwood 5020, 5021, Philips 5022, 5032, 5044 TEAC 5015, 5016, 5034,
AKAI 5043 5031 RCA 5013, 5029 5035, 5037
Asuka 5045 Luxman 5049 Roadstar 5052 Technics 5041
Denon 5019 Marantz 5033 Sharp 5051 Victor 5014
Fisher 5048 Onkyo 5017, 5018, 5030, Sony 5012, 5023, 5026, Yamaha 5024, 5025,
Goldstar 5040 5050 5027, 5028, 5039 5038, 5046, 5047
Hitachi 5042 Panasonic 5036

CD-R
Pioneer 5067
Philips 5054
Yamaha 5055

Cassete Deck
Pioneer 5058, 5059, 5070

Digital Tape
Pioneer 5069

MD
Pioneer 5068

En 99

To register your product, find the nearest authorized service location, to
purchase replacement parts, operating instructions, or accessories,
please go to one of following URLs :

Pour enregistrer votre produit, trouver le service après-vente agréé le plus
proche et pour acheter des pièces de rechange, des modes d’emploi ou
des accessoires, reportez-vous aux URL suivantes :

In the USA/Aux Etats-Unis
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com
In Canada/Aux Canada
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca
S018_B1_EnFr

PIONEER CORPORATION
1-1, Shin-ogura, Saiwai-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa 212-0031, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
340 Ferrier Street, Unit 2, Markham, Ontario L3R 2Z5, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
5 Arco Lane, Heatherton, Victoria, 3202, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002_B3_En

© 2011 PIONEER CORPORATION.
All rights reserved.

<ARB7454-A> Printed in

Vsx 52 operating-instructions051911

More Related Content

What's hot

Similar to Vsx 52 operating-instructions051911

Recently uploaded

Vsx 52 operating-instructions051911